Disocont Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder: Instruction Manual

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix
Weighfeeder
Instruction Manual
BV-H2417 GB
PASS - Service you can rely on
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control,
installation and commissioning through to seamless support
across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists,
you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever –
you need us.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

on hand to analyze problems and failures. Look at
www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest
Schenck Process Location.
Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

Then our service system PASS is the ticket. It covers the en-
tire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full
service. Interested?
Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
© by Schenck Process GmbH

Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
Phone: +49 6151 1531-0 ; www.schenckprocess.com
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,

regardless of method, without prior permission by STOCK
EQUIPMENT in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: Translation of the original German Instruction
(origin: ST4, 36028797238332043 V5)

Contents
Contents
1 About This Manual ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................1
................................1
2 Safety notes................................
notes................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................3
..........3
2.1 Signal Words .........................................................................................................................................4
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ................................................................................................4
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes ..............................................................................................5
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ..........................................................................................6
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ........................................................................................6
3 General Diagram ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..................................................................
..................................7
..7
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?...........................................................................................................7
3.2 Some Definitions ...................................................................................................................................8
3.3 Principle of Measurement and Control ..................................................................................................8
3.4 Regulation Operation Modes .............................................................................................................. 11
4 Operation................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
............................................................................
............................................13
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power ................................................................................................. 13
4.2 Operating and Control Access............................................................................................................ 14
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ........................................ 14
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable .................................................................................................. 15
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 15
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485 ............................................................................................................... 16
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 16
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet ............................................................................................................. 16
4.2.2.2 Connection via RS232 ............................................................................................................... 17
4.2.2.3 Connection via WLAN ................................................................................................................ 17
4.2.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 17
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 18
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU) .......................................................................... 18
4.3 VHM operating panel .......................................................................................................................... 20
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields ..................................................................................................... 21
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device .................................................................................................................... 21
4.3.1.2 Event messages ......................................................................................................................... 21
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range .................................................................................................... 22
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation ........................................................................................................................ 22
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection .......................................................................................................................... 22
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics ................................................................................................. 23
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys ........................................................................................................... 23
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation ................................................................................................... 23
4.3.2 Operating Fields and Function Calls .......................................................................................... 23
DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

Schenck Process Group -i-
Contents
4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions ......................................................................................................... 25

4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off ............................................................................................................... 25
4.3.3.2 Set setpoint ................................................................................................................................ 25
4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint ........................................................................................................................ 26
4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter............................................................................ 26
4.3.3.5 Acknowledging Event Messages ............................................................................................... 27
4.3.4 Special Operating Functions ...................................................................................................... 28
4.3.4.1 Trend .......................................................................................................................................... 28
4.3.4.2 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation............... 30
4.3.4.3 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ........................................................................................................... 30
4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display .............................................................................................. 31
4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ................................................................................. 31
4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings .............................................................................................. 31
4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. ....................................................................... 31
4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation .......................................................................................... 32
4.3.4.9 Control Measurements and Correction ...................................................................................... 32
4.3.5 Service Functions ....................................................................................................................... 33
4.3.5.1 Service Values ........................................................................................................................... 33
4.3.5.2 Display Parameter Alterations.................................................................................................... 36
4.3.5.3 Operating the calibration functions ............................................................................................ 36
4.3.5.4 Reading and Setting Parameters ............................................................................................... 36
4.3.5.5 Setting the Clock ........................................................................................................................ 37
4.3.5.6 Reset to Factory Settings ........................................................................................................... 38
4.3.5.7 Simulation Mode ........................................................................................................................ 38
4.3.5.8 Operating the calibration functions ............................................................................................ 39
4.3.6 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ....................................................................................... 39
4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration ...................................................................................................... 39
4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ............................................................................................... 40
4.3.6.3 Setting the Display ..................................................................................................................... 41
4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) ............................................................................ 41
4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config) ....................................................................................................... 42
4.3.6.6 Configuring the Communication Path (Com) ............................................................................. 43
4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen ...................................................................................................... 43
4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) .................................................................................. 44
4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) .......................................................................................... 44
4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information ........................................................................................ 44
4.4 Adjustment Functions ......................................................................................................................... 45
4.4.1 Tare ............................................................................................................................................ 45
4.4.2 Feed Rate Measurement Adjustment ........................................................................................ 46
4.4.3 Taring the Control Hopper.......................................................................................................... 47
4.4.4 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .................................................................................... 48
BV-H2417GB, 1309 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

- ii - Schenck Process Group
Contents
5 Commissioning ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
...................................................................
...................................49
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components .............................................................................................. 50
5.2 Electrical Connections ........................................................................................................................ 50
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................... 50
5.4 Setting the Speed Controller .............................................................................................................. 51
6 Further Adjustment and Maintenance ................................................................

................................................................................................
..................................................................
..................................53
7 Parameters ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................55
7.1 Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................... 56
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 57
7.3 Configuring Event Messages.............................................................................................................. 58
7.4 Parameter List .................................................................................................................................... 59
7.4.1 Parameter Overview .................................................................................................................. 59
7.4.2 Parameter Details ...................................................................................................................... 77
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules .................................................................................. 77
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ..................................................................................... 81
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ..................................................................................... 86
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ...................................................................................... 89
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .............................................................................................. 91
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ......................................................................................... 92
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring ................................................................................... 93
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters....................................................................................................... 98
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ............................................................................................. 99
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................... 102
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................... 104
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................... 107
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Outputs ....................................................................................... 113
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Maintenance interval ............................................................................. 116
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................... 117
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Communication Fieldbus....................................................................... 117
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Ethernet ................................................................................................. 123
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - PLC Outputs .......................................................................................... 124
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Interlocking ............................................................................................ 126
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Bin Weigher ........................................................................................... 129
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Bin Level Controller ............................................................................... 138
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Check System ....................................................................................... 144
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Moisture................................................................................................. 161
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Load Helixinlet ....................................................................................... 164
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Pressure Compensation........................................................................ 166
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Helix-Switch .......................................................................................... 171
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Helix-Controller ..................................................................................... 174
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Agitator Control ..................................................................................... 177
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - Safety Functions ................................................................................... 180
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - Fixed mode configuration ...................................................................... 184
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................. 187
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................ 191
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Data Logging ......................................................................................... 195
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................... 197
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Bin Weigher Adaption ........................................................................... 198

Schenck Process Group - iii -
Contents
8 Event Messages ................................................................

................................................................................................
...............................................................................................
............................................................... 201
8.1 Events Details ................................................................................................................................... 202
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration .......................................................................................................... 202
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement .......................................................................................... 203
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller ........................................................................................................... 208
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System ............................................................................................... 208
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock ............................................................................................................. 210
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow...................................................................................................... 211
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX ................................................................................................................... 211
8.1.8 Event Group: Mechanic ............................................................................................................ 214
8.1.9 Event Group: MIN .................................................................................................................... 214
8.1.10 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ......................................................................................... 216
8.1.11 Event Group: System Message ............................................................................................... 218
9 Appendix ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
.......................................... 221
9.1 Details on Feed Rate Control ........................................................................................................... 221
9.2 Details on the speed controller ......................................................................................................... 224
9.3 Screw Switchover ............................................................................................................................. 226
9.4 Calculation of the Device Constants ................................................................................................ 228
9.5 Setpoint and switch-on sources........................................................................................................ 229
9.6 Agitator Control ................................................................................................................................. 231
9.7 Bin Weigher: Scales and Filling Limits ............................................................................................. 232
9.8 'Continuous' Control Measurement .................................................................................................. 233
9.9 Details on Control Measurements and Correction 'Single' Type ...................................................... 235
9.10 Continuous Hopper Fill Level Regulation ......................................................................................... 236
9.11 Safety Functionality of Hazardous Material Feeders (Combustibles) .............................................. 237
9.12 Actuating Variable Safety Functionality ............................................................................................ 237
9.13 Setting the Pressure Compensation ................................................................................................. 240
9.14 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ....................................................................................... 241
9.15 PLC Functionality (Optional)............................................................................................................. 244
9.15.1 Handling the Function Blocks................................................................................................... 245
9.15.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals .......................................................................................... 246
9.15.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals ......................................................................................... 247
9.16 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ................................................................................. 249
9.17 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation ....................................................................... 250
Index ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 251

- iv - Schenck Process Group
About This Manual
1 About This Manual

The operating manual for the MULTIFLEX helix weighfeeder is intended both for the scales' operating
personnel and for service technicians. It describes the functionality of the software VSF 20170-003.
The following software releases or later must be available to ensure that a DISOCONT Tersus sys-
tem will operate correctly with this software version:
▪ VPC 20150-022 → Service tool 'Schenck Process EasyServe' (short: EasyServe)
▪ VHM 20170-007 → VHM operating panel
▪ For the sake of simplicity, the DISOCONT Tersus system will also be called the weighing elec-
tronics, controller, scale or unit hereinafter.
– The BV-H2406 system manual contains information on its electronic structure.
– DISOCONT is a registered trademark of Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt.
▪ The Windows-based Schenck Process EasyServe program is a service tool for conveniently
handling continuous scales based on weighing electronics such as DISOCONT Tersus.
– For the sake of simplicity, this tool will also briefly be called EasyServe here.
– The BV-H2185 operating manual describes EasyServe's functionality.
This manual is available in different forms:

▪ A printed version
▪ An electronic document in the platform-independent ADOBE format (file ending: *.PDF)
▪ As online help in the Microsoft Windows HTMLHelp format (file ending: *.CHM)

Schenck Process Group -1-
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and material damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally you should also observe:
▪ Safety information given in order-specific documentation
▪ Safety information relating to mechanical components
▪ Instructions and safety instructions for parts manufactured by third-party suppliers or parts that are not
part of Schenck Process scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Use
The measuring system and connected mechanical components is intended solely for weighing tasks and
related control applications. It is not intended for any other use.
Risks
If properly installed and put into service the measuring system itself does not represent a hazard.
Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Po-
tential sources of danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported or me-
tered in. Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators improperly handle
the system.
This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The operating company is fully
responsible for overall plant safety.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the tech-
nical documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instruc-
tions given.
Changing parameters
The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only personnel familiar with the device's mode
of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Incorrectly set parameters
may cause injury or material damage. They can also adversely affect weighing operation.
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating
company has to ensure safe password handling.

Safety notes
Acknowledging Event Messages

Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any
connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.
Service and Maintenance

▪ All warning and instruction signs on the scales must be observed.
▪ The measuring system must be shut down before work is performed on mechanical equipment or peri-
pheral devices (control systems in particular). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring sys-
tem cannot be inadvertently restarted.
▪ Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply (pull the plug!).
▪ The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.
Moisture and Humidity

All of the parts of the scales, particularly electrical components, must be protected from moisture and humid-
ity when the housing is open such as during service work. Observe housing protection standards.
Design Modifications
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process
voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which
could affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this require-
ment is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the
warranty will be void.
2.1 Signal Words
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

Potential hazards will always exist when working with technical devices. Hazards will arise if the machine
▪ is incorrectly installed,
▪ is started up incorrectly,
▪ is operated by untrained personnel, or
▪ is repaired by unqualified personnel.

-4- Schenck Process Group
Safety notes
In this manual the following signal words will indicate hazards that may arise when using this machine:
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the
most severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up
to and including death.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium
injuries.
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes

Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environ-
mental damage could occur.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product eco-
nomically and at an optimal level of efficiency.

Safety notes
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems.
Once the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components.
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on
live components. Observe, among other things, the following:
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure them against inadvertent restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. Above 1 KV: earth and bypass the cables.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
2.3 Damaged / Defective

Defective Electrical Components
DANGER
Live damaged or defective components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are nei-
ther damaged nor defective.
1. Qualified personnel must immediately replace or, if possible, repair
damaged or defective electrical components.

General Diagram
3 General Diagram
The basic functions of the DISOCONT Tersus in combination with a feeder or measuring equipment will be
explained in this chapter.
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?

DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile modular electronic system for weighing and feeding technology.
Its components are:
▪ the VCU control unit ('scales controller')
▪ the VHM local operating panel
▪ Input/output expansion modules
The DISOCONT Tersus has been designed for continuous measurement and control tasks or for disconti-
nuous batching.
All weighing-related functions and process functions for measuring and feeding bulk solids are performed by
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
The DISOCONT Tersus is customizable and very flexible in terms of its physical layout and interconnection.
DISOCONT Tersus can be used in the following areas with specific software for weighing and feeding job
applications:
▪ Steel
▪ Cement production
▪ Chemical industry
▪ Foodstuffs industry
▪ Power plants
It supports the following plant systems in connection with the right mechanical equipment:
▪ Beltweighers
▪ Weighfeeders
▪ Loss-in-weight feeders
▪ Filling plants
▪ Feeders with a weighing discharge screw (MULTIFLEX)
▪ Mass flow rate measuring devices and mass flow rate feeders that operate on the basis of the Coriolis
® ®
principle (MULTICOR ) or the principle of inertia (MULTISTREAM )
DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

GmbH, Darmstadt, Germany.

General Diagram
3.2 Some Definitions

Basic definitions are given in the following table.
Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Dimension Example
I Actual feed rate Material quantity per unit of time Weight / kg/h or t/h
time
P Feed rate setpoint Preset feed rate, or setpoint, against Weight / kg/h or t/h
which the actual feed rate is controlled time
Z Totalized amount of Material quantity conveyed calculated Weight kg or t

material from the feed rate and the feed time
F Fill weight Weight of the filled material in the feed Weight kg

hopper
Y Controller actuating Amperage mA

variable
Xd Control deviation Difference resulting from setpoint - % %

actual value in relation to the setpoint
n Speed RPM of the discharge organ motor 1/time 1/min

Tab. 1 : Definition for formula symbols

General Diagram
3.3 Principle of Measurement and Control

A helix weighfeeder determines the weight q of the bulk material (actual load) in a discharge screw. The
actual gravimetric feed rate is the product of this weight and the conveying speed through the screw. A
speed setpoint for the bulk material in the discharge screw is obtained from the setpoint feed rate P and the
discharge screw load. The actual speed of the discharge screw is set by a PI controller so that it matches
the setpoint speed.
Fig. 1: Helix weighfeeder principle of regulation (simplified)
n Actual speed detected by the sensor at the motor P Feed rate setpoint
q Actual discharge screw load PI PI controller
I Actual feed rate VFD Output controller for the screw drive

General Diagram
As continuous calculation of the feed rate is subject to manifold sources of error, checks and adjustments
are made based on the loss in weight of the feed hopper while filling is stopped.
Fig. 2: Helix weighfeeder principle of correction
d / dt Difference in weight per unit of time
∆ (delta) Comparison of the measured flow rate
Cor Correction of the weight acquisition
A helix weighfeeder can also be operated as a measuring system with no feed function.

- 10 - Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
3.4 Regulation Operation Modes

The following modes of operation can be selected:
▪ Gravimetric: the target speed for the discharge screw is calculated from the setpoint for the feed rate in
kg/h and the weight of the bulk material in the discharge screw.
▪ Volumetric: the target speed of the discharge screw is calculated from the feed rate setpoint in kg/h and
the weight of the bulk material in the discharge screw that was determined using an adjustment program
during commissioning. The speed is therefore independent of the active weight of bulk material in the
discharge screw.
▪ Volumetric Synchronous: the target speed of the discharge screw is calculated from the feed rate
setpoint in kg/h and the weight of the bulk material in the discharge screw that was determined in gravi-
metric mode before switching to this mode of operation. The speed is therefore independent of the ac-
tive weight of bulk material in the discharge screw in this mode of operation also.
The volumetric modes of operation allow feed operation to continue if the weight signal from the discharge
screw should be disrupted significantly or fail.
The speed controllers for the discharge screws are active in all modes of operation.

Schenck Process Group - 11 -
Operation
4 Operation
This chapter describes the how to operate the DISOCONT Tersus and a connected scales. There are sev-
eral options available:
▪ Normal operation using a local VHM operating console (or consoles). The features of the different panel
versions can be found in system manual BV-H2406. A virtual operating panel can be accessed with a
browser via the web interface.
▪ Operation under normal circumstances using a higher-order system control, with which the control
commands are either exchanged conventionally by means of binary and analog signals or by means of
a fieldbus, e.g. a PROFIBUS.
▪ Operation for service work by means of a wireless VHM operating panel.
▪ Operation for service work by means of the service software EasyServe and a PC or a notebook with a
cable or wireless connection.
▪ Local operation by means of an optional service menu and the VLG local operating unit specifically for
work on the mechanical systems. The special features of the local operating unit can be found in the
system manual BV-H2406.
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

Once power is switched on, the DISOCONT Tersus control unit VCU starts up with a self-test. The system
states are indicated by LEDs on the unit. The significance of the indicators can be found in system manual
BV-H2406.
An optional connected VHM operating panel will start up with a self-test of the display once power has been
connected. Subsequently, it establishes communication to the VCU it was connected to last before power
was switched off.
The version number of the device will then appear for a few seconds before being replaced by the normal
display.
Notes:
▪ The following are retained during a power failure:
– Parameter settings
– Setpoints
– The status of all internal counters
– Counting pulses not yet output to external counters
– Date and time
– All important process values
▪ A specific start command is always required to begin feeding.

Operation
4.2 Operating
Operating and Control Access
DISOCONT Tersus can be operated using the following approaches:
Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

circumstances Model
VHM operating panel X X VHM touch

(permanently installed)
VHM operating panel X VHM touch

(mobile per cable or wireless)
Service operating panel for the X Foil keyboard and display

VMO drive
Plant main computer via Fieldbus X (X) Plant main computer
Web browser via PC X VHM with PC keyboard
Service tool X EasyServe

Tab. 2 : Operating access
DANGER
Feeding can be started using the operating panel. This switches the
drives on, allowing bulk material to flow. Before turning it on, the op-
erator has to make sure that turning it on cannot cause any damage.
Interrupting communications when operating on a non-permanent line
(pluggable cable or radio) may cause dangerous situations. There-
fore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved for ser-
vice work only.
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)

After a loss of power at the operating panel, it automatically attempts to reconnect with the scale it was con-
nected to before the power loss (after an adjustable waiting period). During this waiting period, the Feeder
operating page can be selected again to select a different scale.
If a connection has already been established, although you want to activate communication to a different
scale, you have to end the existing connection. You can do so after registering yourself as a privileged user
by pressing the Sel. Scale button.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-
established even after several attempts, the operating panel jumps into the configuration dialog.
The procedure for selecting a scales is dependent on the form of communication and is described in the
following chapters.

Operation
4.2.1.1
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable
Preconditions: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the VCU
control unit is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
You have to select the Ethernet channel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the operating pan-
el configuration.
Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches in the network for VCU control units
and shows its findings on the Feeder operating page. A button belonging a scale that is displayed is used to
select the scale and establish the data connection.
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth

Conditions: A Bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The scales
must be within transmission range. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system ma-
nual.
The Bluetooth channel has to be selected (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the configuration
of the operator panel.
Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for Bluetooth adapters within
range. Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controllers (VCUs). The outcome is
shown on the Feeder [➙ 41] operating page.
Note: A complete search for Bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is
displayed during the search. There will also be Bluetooth adapters shown to which no con-
nection can be established, either because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or
they are already otherwise connected.
You can select the scale and establish a data connection by pressing the key belonging to the scale dis-
played. It may take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown
in the header of the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: It can only establish a connection to one scale (assuming the scale is not simultaneously
connected to another Bluetooth adapter). It might be necessary to close the other connection
first. The operating panel will continue to attempt to establish a connection if another connec-
tion already exists.
If Bluetooth is used, the scales to whose Bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only
scales with which communication can be made. The Ethernet destination address may not be changed in
the VHM.

Operation
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485

Conditions: The operator panel and controller have to be in the same RS485 network. The hardware re-
quirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel (Configuring the Commu-
nication Path (Com)).
Once the transmission path has been selected, the operator panel jumps to the feeder [➙ 41] page. This is
where the address of VCU is set. The load digits of the Ethernet address (P30.07) of the scales controller
will be used again for addressing at the RS485 bus.
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communi-
cation can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking next to the ad-
dress number. Otherwise this marking will be red.
You can establish the connection to the scale with the Con.Scale button.
Note: The operating panel is the master on the bus. This is why only one operating panel may be
connected on the bus at any one time.
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet

If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using Ethernet.
Conditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an Ethernet cable to the scales network.
Note: Either use a non-coded socket of the VCU for this connection or a special (yellow) cable
when using the red-coded socket.
The EasyServe address must be in the same Ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. It might be poss-
ible to adapt the address in the scanner dialog of EasyServe. A scales can also be addressed using a router
if the network has already been configured. The scale address is input manually and not via scanner dialog.
In this case the PC must have an IP address in the subnet to which it is directly connected.
The easiest way to select is with the EasyServe Connection | Ethernet (Scanner) item on the menu. This
shows all of the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be adjusted here
and a connection to the scales can be established.
If the scales are connected to a different subnet, they are selected manually using Connection|Ethernet
(Manual)' and entering the scale's IP address.
Note: The scales allow one connection only to EasyServe at the same time. A second request via
Ethernet will be rejected. A parallel request via RS232 should not be made.

Operation
4.2.2.2 Connection via RS232

RS232 is only used to make a connection in special cases, e.g. when it is not possible to make a connection
via Ethernet. If there is a power failure to a device while a software program is being loaded, it may be ne-
cessary to establish a connection via RS232 to re-load the software.
Conditions: The PC's serial interface (COM) is connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details see
system manual BV-H2406.
Connect using the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...'.
38400 baud, 8-O-1 is the only permissible communication format. Select the COM port available at the PC
and the scale's address. The address is stored in parameter P15.01 Own Address in the scales.
Note: A software update via RS232 interface can take as much as 20 minutes. Other functions run
slower than would be usual if the connection was made using Ethernet.
Note: Simultaneous EasyServe access via Ethernet and RS232 is not permissible and can lead to
erroneous data.
4.2.2.3 Connection via WLAN

We recommend using WLAN to make a wireless connection to a scales.
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a WLAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem
has been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales.
The PC also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP
address.
In general the WLAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in
the modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN
access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet
connection were made by cable.
4.2.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth

It is more complicated to establish a connection via Bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be
accessed is the one to whose Bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Conditions: Scales and PC are equipped with Bluetooth adapters.
Establishing a connection:
1 Start the Bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.

2 Select the desired scales from the list of adapters displayed.
Note: If the name of the scales was changed it will be necessary to restart the PC in order to dis-
play the changed name.
3 Begin establishing a connection with the Bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353

Operation
4 The PC user must enter a Personal Area Network (PAN) once the connection to the Bluetooth
adapter has been established.
5 The address of the Bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by
parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
6 The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other
scales in the network cannot be addressed.
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU)
Conditions:
▪ The PC is connected to the VCU via Ethernet.
▪ Java is installed on the PC and can be started.
▪ Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages to
occur.
Establishing a connection:
The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser address line. This URL is
composed of the following:
http://<address>/hmi/<display factor>.html
Item: Meaning: Possible values:
<address> VCU IP address e.g. 192.168.240.1

<display factor> Display size on the screen start
start_2x
start_3x
start_4x
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
NOTES:
▪ The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel.
▪ The field used to select a different scales and the configuration dialogs for the VHM operating panel
itself are not available.
▪ Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry keyboard is not shown on the screen.
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU)

The scales controller is equipped with a web server that provides the scale with a homepage. This is only
available in English.
Conditions: The PC can establish an Ethernet connection to the VCU.
Establishing the connection: The IP address of the VCU must be entered into the browser address line.

Operation
Various data from the scales controller can be called up on the left-hand navigation bar.
Navigation entry Function
HMI Opens at a different size the same controller interface as is in the operating panel. Also
HMI_2x refer to: Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) [➙ 18]
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Events Memory of the most recent events (such as alarms or warnings, etc.)
Parameter changes Memory of the most recent changes in parameters
Command log Logs a list of certain commands, e.g. start / stop
Totalizer hourly Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values are also available on the
VHM operating panel.
The minute of saving the data is set after the full hour in P33.01.
Totalizer daily Table of daily-saved totalizing integrators / counters

The time of saving from 00:00 h is set in P33.02.
Totalizer Table of totalizing integrators / counters saved on the command
DataLogger 1 Table of the measured values recorded. The sampling interval can be set using P33.03. The
DataLogger 2 up to 10 process variables that can be recorded are selected using P33.04 ⋯ P33.13. It
begins recording when activating in the Mode operating range.
Tab. 3 : Function calls on the scales controller homepage
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are keyed in stating the entry time. The entries in the
tables are only up-dated when they are called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with
standard programs using select-copy-paste.

Operation
4.3 VHM operating panel

The DISOCONT Tersus system can be equipped with an optional VHM operating panel.
The operating panel is equipped with a touch-sensitive display (i.e., touch screen). The buttons shown
change dynamically depending on the state of the system. The keys are activated by touching the screen. A
touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used.
The following figure shows the structure of the user interface (front view) if it is in communication with a VCU
control unit.
Fig. 3: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display
1 Name of device being controlled 5 Select details and operating keys
2 Field for event messages 6 Field for measured values and graphics
3 Select work field 7 Command and edit keys
4 On and off keys 8 Symbol indicating running operation
The [HOME] button is used to select the basic view.

Notes:
VHM ⇎ VCU ▪ The operating panel works in the Configuration Mode as long as it is NOT in
communication with a scale. Then the [Feeder] buttons are offered in the ‘Se-
lect the Workspace’ (3) range for selecting a scale and [Con. Scale] for estab-
lishing the connection to the scale selected.
Also refer to the 'Operating and Control Access' Chapter.
▪ The communication to a scale has to be interrupted for adjustments to the

display such as brightness and adjusting the touch-sensitive screen. You can
call up the adjustment dialogs for the operating panel with the [Sel. Scale] but-
ton.

Operation
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device

The name of the scales to which the operating panel currently has a data connection is shown in the head-
er. The name is set as a parameter (P02.03) in the device.
4.3.1.2 Event messages

The system performs various tests. An event will be identified if there are any deviations from normal oper-
ating conditions. The way in which the device reacts to such an event can be set by parameter. The event
appears in the field for event messages.
For example:
IL06 (W1) Event: Not Ready for Start
The variables have the following significance:
IL06 Explicit, language-independent identifier for the event
W1 Event class
Event: Not Ready for Start Explanatory text
The following event classes can occur:
Class System status Display
A ALARM: Serious error. Text against a red back-

Drives had to be shut down. ground.
This message must be acknowledged before it can be cleared and the Blinking: not acknowledged
drives restarted.
Static: acknowledged
W1 WARNING 1: Irregular operation. Text against a yellow back-

This could indicate a serious error. ground.
The event did not stop material conveying. Acknowledge the message to Blinking: not acknowledged
clear it.
Static: acknowledged
W2 WARNING 2: Irregular operation.
This could indicate a serious error.
The event did not stop material conveying. The message will be cleared
automatically once the event is no longer pending.

Operation
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range

The selection on the right provides the following operating fields:
Field Function User
HOME Operation and display for normal operation System operating personnel
Trend Shows the transient behavior of process signals System operating personnel
Service personnel
Values Process and measured values System operating personnel

Service personnel
Setup Special displays and operation for setup, diagnostics Service personnel
and service
Login Login for privileged access Service personnel
Help Indication of program versions; System operating personnel

Cleaning the monitor display Service personnel
Sel. Scale Connect to a different scales Service personnel
Some functions are not available to non-privileged users. Beyond this, access to some func-
tions can be switched off per parameter.
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation

The feeder drive can be switched on and off with the keys in this field if the mode of operation and the pa-
rameterization permit it.
WARNING
A start signal will actuate the motors!
There is a risk of injury to people standing within range of the motors. Bulk
material can be transported and may overwhelm downstream components.
The stop signal is not an emergency stop, but rather will stop the facility
normally.
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection

Different screens in a work field can be selected by using the keys in the lower area. The key used often to
acknowledge event messages is available in most displays. Further pages can be called up with the arrow
keys. Key allocation varies between the fields. An overview of the function tree can be seen in section Op-
erating Fields and Function Calls.
Access to individual functions can be limited when setting up the system to privileged user groups.

Operation
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics

Depending on the page selected, current measured values and graphical representations of the mechanical
system and signals are displayed here. Input boxes, e.g. for a setpoint or parameter value, are shown
'recessed'.
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys

Other buttons can be overlaid for special functions in area (7) above the lower detail selection (5). The keys
shown vary with the detail selection in the respective work field. The function of these keys is described in
the relative function sections.
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation

The symbol for a running feed in the upper-left corner indicates the state of the main drive. A rotating rec-
tangle will be displayed when device is switched on. This symbol appears on all display pages.
4.3.2 Operating Fields and Function Calls

The following table lists the location of the most important displays and operating functions.
Work field Detail selection Function Display and operation
HOME Access screen Used during normal operation for continuous entry of the feed rate setpoint.
Mode Rate Control Switches between gravimetric and volumetric operation.
Data Logging Starts and ends logging of process data. Clear the memory.
Keyboard Mode Selects and deselects keyboard mode.

Caution: Under certain circumstances system control com-
mands may no longer work in keyboard mode.
Surge Bin Display the control hopper.
Auto Activate automatic hopper filling
Manual Switch hopper filling to manual. The keys 'Start' and 'Stop' are
used to start and stop filling.
KME Display for the check and correction function using the hopper fill level
Check Start Tare Start the check. The discharge screw tare will be adjusted if
automatic correction has been activated.
Check Start Span Start the check. The feed rate measured by the discharge screw
will be adjusted proportionally if automatic correction has been
activated.
Ack Event Acknowledges identified events.

Caution: The cause of the event must be corrected before the event is acknowl-
edged.

Operation
Work field Detail selection Function Display and operation
Trend Access screen Shows the transient behavior of the configured signals. The keys <<, <, >, >>, Z - and
Z + are used to select the section to be displayed.
Settings Configuration of the running signals to be displayed as per separate specifications.
Values Act. Values Tabular display of selected measured values. The values are selected by parameter.
Total Log Shows a list of the counter readings logged either hourly or daily. The counter read-
ings can also be read via the web server.
Event Log Shows the logged events and operating commands.
Param Log Shows the logged parameter changes.
Totals Shows the current state of the totalizing counter. Counters 1 and 2 can be reset with
the Reset keys.
Setup Access screen Parallel display of two selectable process values.
Parameter Read access for all parameters.

For privileged users: change the parameter values. A description of the operation can
be found in a separate section.
Calibration For privileged users: open and operate the system setup and control programs as per
separate specifications.
Set Time Displays the time. Events are logged with the time of occurrence.
For privileged users: set the time.
Custom For privileged users: load the application-specific parameter set.
Factory For privileged users: load the parameter set with the factory settings.
Simulation For privileged users: start simulation of the external circuit for test run.
Login For privileged users: login to and logoff from the control. Permit access to configuration. The default
Logout password can be found in the description of the parameters for P02.12 and P02.13.
Help Access screen Displays the controller and operating panel program versions.
Clean: Deactivates the touchscreen for cleaning purposes. Normal mode will be returned to in
20 seconds.
Sel. Scale Exit the current screen showing the currently connected scales and establish a data connection to a dif-
ferent scales.
Tab. 4 : Work fields and functions
NOTE: Certain functions are available only to privileged users. The specific user must log on using the key-
word-protected function 'Login' in order to access them. The keyword entered is compared with a variable
key (P02.13 and P02.12) stored in the controller.
Protected functions will show up gray for non-privileged users.

Operation
4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions

This section will describe operation under normal conditions.
Access to certain operating functions can be restricted when setting up the system. They will then be no
longer accessible or accessible with a keyword only. This chapter will describe the complete and unre-
stricted functional range.
4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off

Condition
▪ No alarm may be pending.
▪ The all-clear must be given by discharging elements, in as far as any are connected. Event IL-01 Event:
Run Disabled will be sent if no all-clear is given.
▪ The on switch at the operating panel must be activated. This is the case in keyboard or in normal mode
if the source of the on pulse in P04.01 has been set to 'OP'.
Turning on feeding
▪ Press the ON key.
Display during running feed
▪ Running arrow in the graphical display.
▪ ON appears in the graphical display.
▪ A moving symbol appears in the upper left border.
Turning off feeding
▪ Press the OFF key.
Scales will be switched off. Flow rate measurement will cease after the time set in parameter P06.02 has
elapsed.
Display during stopped feed
OFF appears in the graphical display. Moving displays are turned off.
4.3.3.2 Set setpoint

Condition
▪ Keyboard mode selected, or
▪ Normal mode selected and P04.02 = 'OP'
The setpoint will be displayed in a data-entry frame if it can be altered.
How to Enter the Setpoint
1. Call up the HOME operating page.
2. Press the entry frame, the entry field will open.
3. Clear the old value with the [C] button and key in the value.
4. Complete entry by pressing OK or exit by pressing EXIT.

Operation
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.01 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint

With the relative setpoint Pr, an externally set setpoint Pe can be expressed as a percent. This function is
used to enter a portion of additives, with the command variable being measured.
Conditions
The P04.07 parameter = AI or OP
The effective setpoint for the control is calculated using the following formula:
P = Pe × Pr / 100 %
P = effective setpoint
Pe = External setpoint
Pr = Relative setpoint
It is entered the same way as an absolute setpoint (Set setpoint [➙ 25]).
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.01 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.3.4
4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter
The DISOCONT Tersus has three totalizing counters that sum up the measured quantity of bulk solids. Of
them, counters 1 and 2 can be directly set to zero. Counter 3 cannot be reset. The counters do not have any
independent overflow.
How to reset a totalizing counter
Press the Totals button, then press the button for zero setting the desired counter and confirm the com-
mand.

Operation
HINT
Other ways to reset the counters
The system can also be configured to allow the counters to be reset by
means of an electrical signal. It is still possible to reset the counters from
the system host computer via fieldbus interface. All reset commands work
independently of one another.
4.3.3.5 Acknowledging Event Messages

All of the important functions are monitored. An event message is generated if a malfunction occurs. This
will be displayed in the message field. The event with the highest priority will be displayed if several events
should occur.
The order of priorities is: Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2).
HINT
Displaying earlier events
Select the 'Values' screen and 'Event Log' to display earlier events. Earlier
events can be called up using the navigation keys in the event field. The list
of events can also be viewed via web server and can be exported for an
external evaluation.
How to Acknowledge an Error Message
DANGER
Event messages indicate unusual and/or dangerous states.
For reasons of safety, the causes of any malfunctions must be corrected
before an event message is acknowledged.
To acknowledge an event message, press the 'Ack Event' key that is available on many screens such as in
'HOME'. Once acknowledged, any blinking messages will be displayed continuously. When the cause of the
event has been corrected, the message will be cleared from the message line, although it can be displayed
again using EreignisLog.
A troubleshooting list can be found in section Event Messages.

Operation
4.3.4 Special Operating Functions

This section will describe the functions used for normal operation in special cases. If not stated otherwise,
the text will assume that the work field HOME has been selected (Selecting the operating range [➙ 22]).
4.3.4.1 Trend
The trend is a graphical depiction on the VHM operating panel of the course of process values over time.
HINT
Trend display with EasyServe
EasyServe allows you to adjust trend depictions much more comfortably
and to export measured data. The trend in the VHM is intended to offer
permanent and simple trend depiction.
The trend depiction, stored values from previous weighings and the configuration of the trend will be deleted
if the operating panel suffers a power failure or if it connects to a different scales.
Button Function
<< Open older values into the display window, large increments
< Open older values into the display window, small increments
> Open more recent values into the display window, small increments
>> Open more recent values into the display window, large increments
Settings Enter the configuration dialog (see below)
Z- Increase time period shown
Z+ Decrease time period shown

Tab. 5 : Control keys
Setting the Trend Display
The configuration window appears after Settings is pressed:
Fig. 4: Trend configuration

Operation
1 List of selected trend values 4 Attribute display
2 Clear selected value 5 Apply new setting
3 Add new trend curve 6 Confirm and return to trend
The list (1) shows the process values selected for display. The first time it is called up the list will be empty.
Use the mouse to select a value from the list (1) to configure the display.
The following will be displayed for this value:
▪ the ID
▪ the limit values
▪ the color of the curve in area (4)
Clicking the respective fields will open the corresponding adjustment dialog box.
You can apply the altered values with button Update (5).
Remove a value from the list (1) with button Remove (2).
You can configure a new trend curve with button Add (3).
The characteristic value of the process variable (ID) and the attributes of the curve are entered in line 4. You
can apply the settings with buttons Add (3) and Back (6).
The new process value will now appear in the list (1).
Confirm with the Back button (6) to display the trend.
Often-used IDs can be found in the following table.

The complete list of all available IDs can be found in the manual BV-H2448.
Process value ID Process variable Dimension
1872 Measured actual feed rate kg/h
1874 Totalizing counter 1 kg
1876 Totalizing counter 2 kg
1886 Speed 1/min
1888 Hopper fill level kg
1890 Surge hopper fill level kg
1894 Effective setpoint kg/h
1904 Control deviation % of rated capacity

Tab. 6 : Meaning of the identifier (ID)

Operation
4.3.4.2 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Opera-

Opera-
tion
The feed rate regulator can be operated in different modes of operation.
Gravimetric Operation:
The actual feed rate in units of weight per time is adjusted to the preset setpoint.
The maximum possible setpoint is the same as the nominal feed rate (P03.01). The message SC1 'Event:
Setpoint Limited' is generated if greater entries are made.
Volumetric Operation:
Material discharge is controlled proportional to the setpoint; the weight of the discharge screw has no effect
on the controller output. This mode of operation may be necessary if weight measuring is subject to signifi-
cant interferences and the product of the load and the speed is therefore not a reliable gauge of the dis-
charge output.
Under nominal conditions the feed rate approximately corresponds to the preset setpoint.
The setpoint is limited to the threefold nominal feed rate (P03.01). The message SC1 'Event: Setpoint Li-
mited' is generated if greater entries are made. The actual feed rate value as a product of load and speed is
measured but has no effect on control.
Volumetric Synchronous Operation:
This mode of operation is the same as volumetric operation but ensures a smooth transition from gravime-
tric operation by taking into consideration the mean regulator output value calculated during gravimetric
operation.
Setting Regulator Mode
Press the 'Mode' key followed by 'Rate Control'. Press the key with the desired selection.
Display
The mode of operation is indicated in the overview page graphical representation by the identifiers 'GRAV',
'VOL' and 'VOL S'.
4.3.4.3 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF

You can use the Keyboard mode function place the preselected operating sources for switching on/off, for
specifying the setpoint and the source for the batch setpoint onto the keyboard of the VHM operating panel.
The previous sources will take effect if keyboard mode is deactivated. Since operating via Easy-
Serve corresponds to operating with the keyboard on the operating unit, this switch also has an impact on
operating via EasyServe.
Note: When switching to keyboard from an external source (e.g. serial fieldbus), the ON/OFF status of the
scales, the setpoint and the batch setpoint are maintained. The external signals are effective when switching
in the opposite direction.
How to set up keyboard mode
Pressing the Mode buttons, changing to the second display page via arrow key and Keyboard mode there.

Operation
Display
The ON, OFF' buttons and the setpoint input space are visible in the keyboard mode. These fields are only
visible in normal mode if the operating sources have been set to the operating panel (OP).
4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display

The touchscreen is deactivated for a set period of time to allow the display to be cleaned. No acidic or
strongly abrasive cleaning agents may be used. During cleaning, a clock will count down from 20 seconds to
zero. The screen will remain white during this time with the exception of the progress indicator. This allows
defective pixels to be spotted. The touchscreen will be automatically reactivated once the time has elapsed.
How to initiate cleaning mode
Press the 'Help' key followed by 'Clean:'.
4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors')

The event with the highest priority will permanently be displayed in the corresponding display line. Press the
'Values' key followed by 'Event Log' to display older events or events of lower priority. Other events can then
be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of events is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comfortably displayed or
downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries
(in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings

The readings of the totalizing counters can be stored cyclically. The stored values are available as a at the
operating panel and in list form in the web browser.
Press the Values button and then Total Log button display them on the operating panel. Individual entries
can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (in as far as so many
entries have already been made).
4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations.

Press the Values button and then the Param Log button to show changes in parameters. Previous altera-
tions can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of parameter alterations is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comforta-
bly displayed or downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the
previous 500 entries (in as far as so many entries have already been made).

Operation
4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation

The measured values of the additional bin weigher are displayed in a separate screen. It is only possible to
display this when the bin weigher is activated via P20.01 Bin Weigher Active.
To open the display:
Press the Surge Bin button.
You can not only see the current bin weight, but also the limits set per parameter. The parameters can be
adapted right on the screen if you register with sufficient privileges.
Parameters No. Meaning
Bin Level MAX P20.18 Upper threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if exceeded.
Control Level MAX P20.13 Fill level at which the filling will be stopped.
Control Level MIN P20.12 Filling is started if the fill level falls below this threshold.
Bin Level MIN P20.15 Lower threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if level falls
below this level.
Tab. 7 : Bin weigher parameters
Button Effect
Auto The filling is regulated automatically by means of the threshold values 'Control Level MIN'
and 'Control Level MAX' set.
Manual The filling of the hopper is controlled by the operator using the keys 'Start' and 'Stop'. For
reasons of safety filling is automatically stopped if the limit 'Control Level MAX' is ex-
ceeded.
Start Begin filling the hopper.
Stop End filling the hopper.

Tab. 8 : Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level
Refer to Adjustment Functions for information on adjusting the bin weigher.
4.3.4.9 Control Measurements and Correction

A control measurement is used to check the calibration of the helix weighfeeder by means of the loss in
weight of the hopper and to perform an adjustment if discrepancies are detected. In general control and
correction is started in set cycles so the operator is not required to enter any information. Independent of the
automatic start, a control can also be initiated in the operating field 'KME' as long as no control has been
started automatically that is not yet finished.

Operation
Button Corrective goal
Check Start Tare It is assumed that potential errors in measuring the weight of the discharge screw must
be identified, and that these errors cause an alteration in the tare. Such errors can be
caused by caking or deposition of bulk material either inside or outside of the screw on
the discharge screw tube. Changes in temperature can also lead to additive measure-
ment errors in the sensor. Additive errors show up as divergences from the correct feed
rate value that are independent of the current screw load.
Check Start Span It is assumed that potential errors in the measurement of the bulk material speed must
be identified. Errors of this kind can arise if the bulk material does not move forward
through the discharge screw or moves through it with the speed that could in theory be
expected from the screw rotation. This effect depends on the flow properties of the bulk
material.
Tab. 9 : Corrective goal of the control measurement
In one working point with identical feed rates and unchanged bulk material both corrective procedures lead
to a minimization of the divergence error between the measured and actual feed rates. However, if the cor-
rective goal is incorrectly chosen, measuring errors that require renewed correction at this working point
may arise if the bulk material is changed or if the feed rate setpoint is altered.
An group 'CH' event is generated if the result of the check identifies an error that lies outside of the preset
limits. No correction will be made in this case. The reasons should be identified if these event messages
occur frequently. They could be an indication of measuring and thus feeding errors!
The following causes can lead to errors outside of the tolerance range:
▪ Control hopper filling was not stopped during measurement or bulk material continued to trickle into it.
Check the refill equipment and the refill control.
▪ Fluctuations in pressure around the area of the hopper refill opening or fluctuations in pressure on the
discharge side caused large errors in weight measurement. Caution: Even fluctuations in pressure of
only a few mbar can result in significant interference forces.
▪ Force shunts at the hopper, weights are not only transferred to the load cells. Forces caused by air
movements and contact with the scales can cause errors in weight measurement.
4.3.5 Service Functions

The functions described here are as a rule used only for system setup, troubleshooting or to alter the control
properties.
Some functions are accessible only to privileged users who have logged onto the controller (also refer to:
Operating Fields and Function Calls).
4.3.5.1 Service Values

Two display areas for additional process values appear once the operating field 'Setup' is called up. This
display is of particular use for diagnostics.
The value to be displayed can in each field be selected using the arrow keys. The fields are interdependent
on each other, i.e. two different process values can be displayed simultaneously in order to analyze interre-
lationships between them.

Operation
Opening the Service Values

1. Call up the 'Setup' field with the button in the right-hand column.
2. Select the values to be displayed with the arrow keys in each respective area.
The following service values are available (values of inactive units and functions are faded out):
Service value Example Explanation
Current Time 2010-09-06 Internal clock time

09:50:27
VCU1:DO (LSB..MSB) 0100 0000 State of the main VCU's binary outputs
0: Output not activated
1: Output activated
In the example: D02 activated
The state can also be read on the device's LEDs.
VCU2:DO (LSB..MSB) 0000 1000 See: Dig.Out (LSB..MSB), but for expansion VCU with address 2.
VCU3:DO (LSB..MSB) 1000 1000 See: Dig.Out (LSB..MSB), but for expansion VCU with address 3.
VCU1:DI (LSB..MSB) 0100 0-- State of the main VCU's binary inputs
0: Input not active
1: Input active
In the example: DI02 active
The display is shown as per the following table for EN 60947-5-6
(NAMUR) sensor inputs.
Condition VHM EasyServe
Sensor covered 1 1
Sensor not covered 0 0
Input open - 1
Short circuit at input + 0
The last two states will output an error in the EasyServe service dis-
play regardless of the event class set.
The state can also be read on the device's LEDs.
VCU2:DI (LSB..MSB) 0000 1-- See: Dig.In. (LSB..MSB), but for expansion VCU with address 2.
VCU3:DI (LSB..MSB) 0001 0-- See: Dig.In. (LSB..MSB), but for expansion VCU with address 3.
Time Voltage ON: 900 h Accumulated time in which the power was switched on.
Time Feeder ON: 700 h Accumulated time in which conveyance was switched on.
Tachometer 1 1000.00 Hz Frequency of the pulse tachometer at feeder drive 1
Tachometer 2 1000.00 Hz Frequency of the pulse tachometer at feeder drive 2
Utilization LC 33.333 % Load on the load cell at the discharge screw outlet (P05.06) as a % of
the nominal load of the cell.
Loadcell 1 0.674536 mV/V Output voltage of the load cell at the discharge screw outlet (P05.06)
in relation to its input voltage.

Operation
Analog Output 1 14.00 mA Current output at the analog output AO1 of the main VCU with address
1. With an output voltage, the range 0 ... 10 V is represented by
0 ... 20 mA.
VCU2: Analog Input 2 14.00 mA Current output at analog output AO2 of the main VCU with address 1.
Analog Output 3 14.00 mA Current output at analog output AO3 of the main VCU with address 1.
Analog Input 1 10.00 mA Current input at analog output AI1 of VCU1. The range 0...10 V will be
displayed as 0 ... 20 mA when voltage is input.
VCU2: Analog Output 1 14.00 mA Current output at analog output AI2 of the expansion VCU with ad-
dress 2. The range 0 ... 10 V will be displayed as 0 ... 20 mA when
voltage is output.
VCU2: Analog Output As for the main VCU with address 1, but for the expansion VCUs with
1VCU2: Analog Output addresses 2 and 3.
2VCU2: Analog Output
3VCU2: Analog Input
1VCU2: Analog Input 2
VCU3: Analog Output
3VCU3: Analog Input
1VCU3: Analog Input 2
BIN: Loadcell 0.50000 mv/V Raw measured value from the hopper scales (see P20.02 for the
channel) in relation to the load cell supply voltage.
Check Measurem. 10.00 % Divergence of the differential of the hopper weight and the actual feed
Window rate value in relation to the nominal feed rate (P03.01)
Yb 8.00 mA Actuating variable for the optional speed-controlled hopper filling

equipment
Ybi 5.00 mA Internal actuating variable, see block diagram [➙ 236]
Actual Tare 10.100 kg Value of the current tare for discharge screw weight recording
LC-Raw Helixinlet 0.800 mV/V Output voltage of the optional load cell at the discharge screw inlet
(see P24.01 for the channel)
Load Helixinlet 12.00 kg Load at the discharge screw inlet (optional)
Helix Load (raw) 18.00 kg Raw measuring value at the discharge screw outlet
Total Weight 8000.00 kg Total weight of the weighing channels relevant for the control (see
P22.02)
Helix Speed Setpoint 70.00 % Target rotational speed of the discharge screws as a % of their nomin-
al rotational speed (P03.02)
Helix Setpoint S1 71.00 % Target rotational speed of discharge screw 1 as a % of its nominal
rotational speed (P03.02)
Helix Setpoint S2 69.00 % Target rotational speed of discharge screw 2 as a % of its nominal
rotational speed (P03.02)
Deviation S1 2.00 % Control deviation of the rotational speed of discharge screw 1 as a %

of its nominal rotational speed (P03.02)

Operation
Deviation S2 -2.00 % Control deviation of the rotational speed of discharge screw 2 as a %

of its nominal rotational speed (P03.02)
Controller Mag. S1 5.00 mA Actuating variable at discharge screw 1
Controller Mag. S2 6.00 mA Actuating variable at discharge screw 2
Temperature 48.89 °C Temperature of the VCU1 processor
Deviation abs. 0.1 % Feed rate controller deviation as a % of the nominal feed rate
DISOCONT Tersus VLW 20170-003 Program version of the main VCU
FCB Variant Empty Name of the function block link loaded (optional)
4.3.5.2 Display Parameter Alterations

Changes made to parameters are archived in the system. Press the 'Values' key followed by 'Param Log' to
display the stored values. Previous values can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
4.3.5.3 Operating the calibration functions

DISOCONT Tersus offers a range of calibration functions to facilitate commissioning and changing bulk
material. All functions are operated according to the same principles. The Adjustment Functions Chapter
summarizes the individual functions, what is required for them and their results.
To call up: Press the 'Setup' key followed by 'Calibration' and 'Programs “
Use the arrow keys to select and display the name of the program in the upper part of display area 6 (see
VHM operating panel [➙ 20]). Operating information will also appear here.
Further information and program results are shown in the lower part of the display area.
The keys in area 7 of the display are used for operation (see VHM operating panel [➙ 20]).
Button Function
Start Run the selected program
Apply Transfer the results to the parameter and end the program
Cancel Discard the results and abort the program. Programs can be aborted at any time.
Tab. 10 : Keys for the calibration programs
4.3.5.4 Reading and Setting Parameters

The control program was structured such that no programing knowledge is necessary to adapt the system to
local conditions. Parameters define the properties. The meaning of the parameters can be found in the de-
tailed parameter description in section 'Parameters'.
Call up: Setup button and then Parameter button
Parameters that require frequent changes due to bulk material changes are summarized in Selection.
You can access all parameters via All.

Operation
The parameters are structured in blocks to give a better overview. parameters are composed as follows:
Pxx.yy <Text>, where: xx: Block number

yy: Number of the parameter in the block
<Text> Explanatory name of the parameter (language-dependent)
Depending on the situation, individual parameters or groups of parameters may be faded

out to highlight the parameters important to an application. Hidden parameters can only be
shown via EasyServe and activated there for the display on the VHM operating panel whe-
rever necessary. The fading out may result in breaks in the numbering. Some parameters
can be write protected. The write protection can also be configured using EasyServe.
NOTE: The following description applies to a visible and write unprotected parameter accessed by a user
with sufficient user privileges.
The parameter group is displayed and selected in the upper part of display area 6 (see VHM operating pan-
el [➙ 20]). Use the arrow keys to scroll through the groups. Individual parameters in a group can be se-
lected in the lower half of display area 6.
A parameter can be selected directly with the keyboard symbol.
The value of the parameter is shown in display area 7 (see VHM operating panel [➙ 20]) of the command
and edit keys.
The Edit button calls up the dialog for changing the selected parameters. The parameter's identifier will ap-
pear in the focus of the upper part of display area 6 and its current value in the lower part. Depending on the
type of parameter the arrow keys can be used either to assign a new value to the parameter or a value can
be entered for it. A changed value is written into the parameter via Store resident. An alternative is discard-
ing the change with the Exit or Back button. In the latter case the parameter value will remain unchanged.
4.3.5.5 Setting the Clock

DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues run-
ning for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The
clock buffer is maintenance-free.
The time is recorded in the process value logs.
How to set the clock:
Press the 'Setup' button and then 'Set Time'.
The current values for date and time appear in display space 6 (refer to VHM operating panel [➙ 20]).
Touch the entry field to open an entry dialog. Either touch the screen or use the arrow keys to move the
cursor in the entry field. Finish the procedure and change the time with [OK]. The dialog is exited via Cancel
without changing the clock.

Operation
4.3.5.6 Reset to Factory Settings

DISOCONT Tersus has three independent sets of parameters:
Parameter set Usage Load procedure at the operating panel.
Active parameter set Set controller behaviour Individual parameter values can be altered (see
Reading and Setting Parameters [➙ 36]).
Backup set Pre-prepared parameter set for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Custom'
certain applications or settings you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
after commissioning meter set.
Factory settings Unalterable set of parameters for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Factory'
the basic configuration you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
meter set.
Tab. 11 : Parameter sets: Usage and activation
WARNING
Irretrievable loss of adjusted parameters
Loading the backup parameter set or the factory settings will overwrite all of
the parameters in the active parameter set. The overwrite cannot be re-
versed. We recommend you to use EasyServe to save a copy of the cur-
rent parameter set to the PC drive before overwriting.
4.3.5.7 Simulation Mode

For commissioning, the DISOCONT Tersus can simulate important process values for training and test pur-
poses without starting aggregates and without requiring all sensors to be connected. Load and speed values
are simulated internally.
WARNING
Output signals are set in simulation mode. This allows externally
connected motors to start. The system will show that material is flow-
ing.
The starting motors may represent a hazard. The on signal can activate
systems upstream of the feeder whether the feeder is prepared to receive
the bulk material or not.
Selecting simulation mode with a sequence of keys:

[Setup], [right arrow], [Simulation]

Operation
4.3.5.8 Operating the calibration functions

DISOCONT Tersus offers a range of calibration functions to facilitate commissioning and changing bulk
material. All functions are operated according to the same principles. The Adjustment Functions Chapter
summarizes the individual functions, what is required for them and their results.
To call up: Press the 'Setup' key followed by 'Calibration' and 'Programs “
Use the arrow keys to select and display the name of the program in the upper part of display area 6 (see
VHM operating panel [➙ 20]). Operating information will also appear here.
Further information and program results are shown in the lower part of the display area.
The keys in area 7 of the display are used for operation (see VHM operating panel [➙ 20]).
Button Function
Start Run the selected program
Apply Transfer the results to the parameter and end the program
Cancel Discard the results and abort the program. Programs can be aborted at any time.
Tab. 12 : Keys for the calibration programs
4.3.6 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel

The operating panel configuration is autonomous of the scales configuration. The operating panel has a
proprietary set of parameters stored in the operating panel itself only. These parameters can be accessed
by means of a special dialog. User prompts in the configuration dialog are always in English, regardless of
the language set for the scales.
4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration

Once power to the system has been switched on, the operating panel will show 'VHM-SPG' in the headline
of the display. Open the operating panel configuration dialog by pressing any key other than [Con.Scales].
▪ Alternatively: If the operating panel is already displaying a scales' operating pages, the configuration
dialog can be opened with the 'Sel. Scale' key without requiring the supply voltage to be switched off
and on (Operating Fields and Function Calls).
The adjustment ranges are called up with the keys in area 3 [➙ 21] of the display. Some functions are
accessible only to privileged users.
Button Function Password

protected
VHM addr. Set the VHM IP address Yes
Display Set the display parameters Yes
Feeder Select the scales to which a connection is to be established
Config Detailed adjustment of the scales' web server homepage Yes
Com Set the path for communication with the scales Yes
Calibration Adjust touchscreen entry

Operation
Button Function Password

protected
Login Login for privileged users
Con.Scales Connect to a scales
Help Display software version

Disable touchscreen to clean display
Tab. 13 : Keys in the VHM configuration dialog
4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.)

Every device in the communication network must have a unique address. The VHM address is set in the
configuration dialog with the key 'VHM addr.'. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 44].
Field Meaning Factory settings
IP Unique IP address in the scales controller subnetwork (VCU). 192.168.240.21

The last group of digits in the IP address is also the unit's ad-
dress when communicating through the local bus.
Subnet Subnetwork template 255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address of the gateway to other networks 0.0.0.0

Tab. 14 : Fields for setting the address

Operation
4.3.6.3 Setting the Display

Display
The 'Display' key opens the dialog for adjusting the display settings. The key is accessible only to a user
with privileged access [➙ 44].
Button Parameter Function Factory settings
Inactivity Inactivity ti- Length of time from the most recent activity until the bright- 20 min
timeout meout ness of the screen is automatically reduced. The screen will
return to normal brightness once the screen is touched. This
contact will not be interpreted as communication with the
scales.
Logout timeout Length of time from the most recent entry before a privileged 600 min
user is automatically logged out of the system security rea-
sons.
Working Display brightness during operation. At full brightness the display has a life expectancy of approximately
brightness 5 years. This expectancy can be increased to over 10 years by dimming the brightness a little.
Sleeping Brightness after a longer period with no activity.

brightness Note: If the display touchscreen is not to be used and the display is intended to be permanently fully
legible, the sleeping brightness can be set to the same level as the operating brightness.
Save Save the changes made. Changes are discarded without prompting if they were not saved beforehand.
Tab. 15 : Parameters for the display
4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder)

(Feeder)
The display shows the scales available in the network. Scales are selected by means of its corresponding
key.
Button Function
Buttons beside Select the scales

an entry
Configure Configure the scales by entering:

Scales name
IP address
Subnetwork mask
Gateway
Note: This functions allows the IP address of a VCU to be set without using EasyServe. The
addresses of the VHM and the VCU are generally in the same subnetwork.
The 'Back' key will discard the changes.
The 'Save' key will save the changes.
Tab. 16 : Keys in the list of scales

Operation
4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config)

As with a web browser, the homepage of the scales' user interface must also be specified. The key is ac-
cessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 44].
Parameter / Key Function Factory settings
URL of homepage Address of the scales' web server homepage. A web http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
browser on a PC can open the scales' user interface at
this address.
Under normal circumstances the scales are selected on
the 'Feeder' page. The start address is entered automati-
cally.
Communication will be automatically established to the
last address entered here once power resumes after a
power failure.
Start timeout Length of time between command to connect to a scales 7 s

and the start of connection. This period can be used to
access the operating panel configuration [➙ 39].
Save Save the settings. The entries are discarded if they are
not saved before the page is left.
Tab. 17 : Setting startup routine

Operation
4.3.6.6 Configuring
Configuring the Communication Path (Com)
Select the medium of communication here. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 44].
Selection Function Remarks Factory settings
Ethernet Communication via Ethernet interface and The complete IP address of the x
the RJ45 plug. scales will be used when selected.
Bluetooth Communication via Bluetooth will be auto- All Bluetooth adapters within range
matically activated if a Bluetooth adapter is are listed in the 'Feeder' selection.
connected (wireless interface for portable Each scales must be equipped with its
devices). own adapter. Scales connected to
each other via Ethernet can commu-
nicate via Bluetooth only to the scales
to whose adapter the operating panel
has been connected.
A subordinate IP connection is estab-
lished in a separate subnetwork.
Therefore the IP subnetwork address
displayed in the VHM differs from the
scales' subnetwork address stored in
the parameter.
RS485 Communication via serial interface The last part of the scales' IP address
(1 ... 254) will be used when selected.
The IP address must therefore also
be set when using an interface of this
kind.
Tab. 18 : Alternatives
The select scales page will automatically open if the communication path is changed. The scales stores its
addresses in a parameter.
Details on possible alternative cablings of operating panel and scales are described in the system manual
BV-H2406.
4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen

The touch sensitive screen is calibrated in relation to the display using this function. Calibration is required if
a key is unintentionally depressed when a neighboring key is touched or if a function can only be activated
by pressing the area next to the key on the screen.
Once the 'Start' button has been pressed, you will be prompted to touch points on the screen marked with a
cross. The calibration will be automatically stored once this has been successfully performed. The proce-
dure is automatically repeated if faults are identified during the adjustment.
The adjustment is always called up during the start procedure once the software is loaded into the VHM.

Operation
Note:
A touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used. The adjustment
should be made with an object that is as similar as possible to the one that will be used in subsequent nor-
mal operation.
4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout)

Some of the operating panel settings are protected against unauthorized access. Access is available only to
users with access privileges.
The keyword is: 7353
The keyword cannot be changed and is independent of the scales' keyword settings.
4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale)

The operating panel will begin working normally once communication has been established to a scales. The
operating panel will wait [➙ 42] for a period after the 'Con.Scale' key is pressed and then try via the confi-
gured path [➙ 42] to connect to the scales that was selected on the 'Feeder' [➙ 41] page. The attempt will
be repeated several times. If the scales cannot be reached at that address the program will branch to the
'Feeder' scales selection.
The connection attempt can be interrupted by pressing another key and the configuration dialog for the op-
erating panel can be called up again. The routine is also called up if the system is restarted after a power
failure.
4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information

The key 'Help' opens a window with information on the software version and with basic scales controller
settings 'Feeder' (VCU) and operating panel settings 'VHM'. These data and if possible the Easy-
Serve parameter file should be kept at hand if making an inquiry to Schenck Process.
The serial number of the controller VCU also appears in the EasyServe scanner. It can be used to identify
the VCU in the network if erroneous, non-unique IP addresses have been assigned.
'FCB Variant:' is the designation for the loaded variant of the function block links [➙ 244]. 'FCB Variant:'
'Empty' refers to the state with no expanded functions, which is the state described in this manual.
The 'Clean:' key switches the operating panel into cleaning mode for a short time. A counter will appear on
the display and count down the time remaining until the panel returns to normal. Touch entry is deactivated,
allowing the screen to be touched for cleaning without inadvertently giving a command.

Operation
4.4 Adjustment Functions

The DISOCONT Tersus uses adjustment functions to facilitate commissioning and bulk material changes.
These functions store their outcomes in parameters, thus adapting the control to the application. All parame-
ters that arise from the design of the scales and the electrical connections must be set before the calibration
functions are called up.
As a rule the calibration functions are accessible only to privileged users. These users must first login to the
system (Operating Fields and Function Calls). The adjustment functions can be called up both at the operat-
ing panel VHM and in the EasyServe service software. They can also be operated via the fieldbus connec-
tion, in as far as one has been activated (P16.01).
Note: If several material-dependent parameter sets are used, the outcome of the programs are stored in the
currently operative set. The values in the other sets remain unchanged.
4.4.1 Tare
The adjustment program calculates the empty weight (tare) of the discharge screw and the hopper. It saves
these values in a parameter. During operation the tare is subtracted from the measured weight values to
give the weight of the bulk material.
Condition ▪ No bulk material in the feeder hopper or the discharge screw.

▪ Force shunts from connected devices and flexible connecting elements have been
minimized. Any compressive forces that may arise have been compensated for.
▪ Refilling must be switched off.
To call up Select and start the adjustment program 'TW: Tare'
Program runtime 30 s
Display while running Program time remaining

Value of the current tare for discharge screw weight recording as a percentage of the load
cell nominal load (P05.03).
Display when finished Deviation of the current tare measurement from the previous value (P10.07) as a percen-
tage of the previous value.
Negative indication: the tare calculated was smaller.
Tare as a percentage of the rated load cell load (P05.03)
Parameters changed P10.07 , P20.25 , P24.07

when results are accepted
Potential events and LO01 'Event: LC Input < MIN': Initial load < 3 % of rated load cell load (P05.03). Error in
messages the weight measuring. Check load cells, cabling and whether there are any force by-
passes.
Tab. 19 : The details and course

Operation
4.4.2 Feed Rate Measurement Adjustment

Entering the device constants from P10.05 'Norming Factor Feedrate' in the data sheet presets the feed rate
measurement. We recommend that you preset the device constants. The adjustment program described
here makes adapts the value more accurately to the mechanics.
The adjustment program calculates the interrelationship between the product of the speed and bulk material
weight in the screw and the actual discharge output calculated from the hopper measurements and enters
the result as a device constant in a parameter. The program corresponds to a control measurement
[➙ 32] but enters the result into the basic settings.
Caution: Bulk material is conveyed during adjustment. Downstream processes must be able to receive this
material!
Preconditions ▪ Sufficient bulk material in the feeder hopper (load > 1 % of P20.04) but hopper not
overfilled.
▪ Discharge screw filled with bulk material up to the outlet.
▪ Force shunts at the hopper and the screw from connected devices and flexible con-
necting elements have been minimized. Any pressure forces arising have been com-
pensated for.
▪ Refilling must be switched off.
▪ Downstream processes must be able to receive material. The conveyor speed is set
by P10.03.
▪ The bulk material should be homogenous.
▪ The flow of material should be uniform and blockages may not be allowed to form at
the screw inlet or outlet.
▪ The feed rate must be adapted to suit the downstream process stages.
To open Select the 'Vol. Discharge Adaption' adjustment program and start it
Program runtime The duration of the program is set by P10.02. In general, the minimum duration should be
10 revolutions.

Hopper weight in kg
Display when finished Mean feed rate in kg/h, calculated from loss in weight over time
Mean screw loading in kg
Mean rotational speed
Device constants calculated
Parameter changed if P10.05, P10.04

results are taken over
Possible events and mes- Check interrupted

sages Possible reasons:
Load on the hopper load cells < 1 ‰ of P20.04
Hopper refilling has been started
Mean rotational speed < 1 ‰ of P03.02
Feed rate calculated from the loss in weight of the hopper < 1 ‰ of the nominal feed rate
P03.01.
Tab. 20 : Details and procedure

Operation
The program should be run three times and the results noted. The system is running steadily if the results
deviate from each other by less than 5 %. Then the average of these results or the result of one further
measurement can be entered into the parameter.
Note: The device constants can also be calculated mathematically by approximation from the characteris-
tics of the mechanical system. Details can be found in the appendix [➙ 228].
4.4.3 Taring the Control Hopper

The adjustment program calculates the empty weight (tare) of the control hopper and enters this value into a
parameter. During operation the tare is subtracted from the measured hopper weight values to give the
weight of the bulk material.
Preconditions ▪ There must be no bulk material in the feed hopper and the discharge element.
▪ Force bypasses due to fittings and cables must have been minimized.
▪ Any compressive forces that may arise have been compensated for.
▪ Hopper filling must be switched off.
To open Select and start the adjustment program 'TB: Tare'
Program runtime 10 s

Tare as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P20.04)
Display when finished Deviation of the current tare measurement from the previous value (P20.25) as a percen-
tage of the previous value.
Negative indication: the tare calculated was smaller.
Tare as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P20.04)
Parameter changed if P20.25

results are taken over
Possible events and mes- None

sages

Operation
4.4.4 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation

Regulation
The adjustment program optimizes the fill level regulation by filling the control hopper using a continuous
(speed) controlled metering hopper. This program applies only if P21.01 = YES.
Precondition ▪ Continuous control activated (P21.01).

▪ The volumetric feed constant of the metering hopper was determined and entered into
P21.06.
▪ The material transport time of the bulk material on the metering path for sections with
constant speed is entered into P21.07.
To open Select the 'BIN: Controller Optimization' adjustment program and start it.
Program runtime Take results over immediately.
Display while running -
Display when finished Results for the proportional component and the reset time of the fill level controller.
Parameter changed if P21.08

results are taken over P21.09
Possible events and mes- Feed constant in P21.06 too small. Determine the correct value and enter it.
sages

Commissioning
5 Commissioning
DISOCONT Tersus allows the adjustment steps to be carried out in any order. Individual steps can be re-
peated as often as necessary. However, for commissioning we recommend that you follow the order shown
here as the adjustment programs may otherwise record erroneous results.
Step Task
1 Preparations ▪ Perform or inspect assembly and cabling

▪ Function test of controller and interface to the plant controller
▪ Enter the parameters given in the data sheet and the circuit diagram
(parameter group P05.xx and P20.xx). The load cell data in particular
must be entered.
▪ All process connections (flexible connecting elements) must be in an
operational condition.
▪ Hopper and discharge screws must be empty.
2 Tare Tare the helix weighfeeder [➙ 45] and hopper [➙ 47].
3 Perform helix weighfeeder check ▪ The measured value for the screw load (service value) may deviate from
zero by less than 1 % of the nominal value of the load cell.
▪ The screw tube must be made to vibrate visibly. The load displayed may
not deviate by more than 1 % from the nominal value of the load cell once
these vibrations have subsided.
Impermissibly high force shunts are acting on the screw if these conditions
are not satisfied. These must be removed. Step 2 may need to be repeated.
4 Perform check of the helix weigh- ▪ Place a calibration weight of at least 10 % of the load cell nominal load
feeder weighing area exactly vertically above the load cell at the discharge screw outlet. The
weight displayed for this weight may not deviate from its actual value by
more than 1 %. Otherwise the scales must be inspected for force shunts.
5 Perform bin weigher check ▪ The measured value for the bin load (service value) may deviate from
zero by less than 1 % of the nominal value of the load cell.
▪ The bin must be made to vibrate visibly. The load displayed may not
deviate by more than 1 % from the nominal value of the load cell once
these vibrations have subsided.
Impermissibly high force shunts are acting on the bin if these conditions are
not satisfied. These must be removed. Step 2 may need to be repeated.
6 Perform bin weigher weighing ▪ We recommend carrying out this step, but it may be skipped if no calibra-
area check tion weight can be applied.
▪ Place a calibration weight of at least 1 % of the load cell nominal load on
the bin. The weight displayed may not deviate from its actual value by
more than 1 %. Otherwise the scales must be inspected for force shunts.
7 Check for external pressures and Remove the calibration weights if necessary.
force shunts Start up the equipment up- and downstream of the scales. Start the filters,
activate extraction. Do not allow any bulk material to fall into the bin.
Start the feeder in volumetric mode.
Repeat steps 3 and 5. The load displayed (screw and bin) may not be greater
than 1 ‰ of the respective nominal load of the load cells if the system is being
run with no bulk material.
You may need to check the pressure ratios and compensate for the pressure
forces mechanically.

Commissioning
Step Task
8 Setting the fill limits Using its bulk density and the bin capacity, determine for the lightest bulk
material that can be expected the weight F0 for full bins.
Set P20.09 'Nominal Bin Load' to 80 % of F0
Set the filling limits:
Set P20.12 'Control Level MIN' to 50 %
Set P20.13 'Control Level MAX' to 90 %
With continuous fill level control, set P21.05 'Setpoint Bin Level' to 60 % of
F0.
9 Setting the Speed Controller Refer to chapter Setting the Speed Controller [➙ 51]
10 Fill the feeder unit ▪ Start bin filling and fill the bin with sufficient bulk material.
▪ Start feeding in volumetric mode with a small nonzero setpoint until the
screw begins to discharge material.
11 Adjusting the device constants Start adjustment of the feed rate measurement [➙ 46] in volumetric opera-
tion.
(the feed rates are set with P10.03)
Note: The device constants can also be calculated mathematically from the
characteristics of the mechanical system. Details can be found in the appen-
dix.
12 Normal operation Switch to gravimetric operation and activate the automatic check and correc-
tion (parameter group P22.xx).
Tab. 23 : Recommended order of steps during commissioning
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components

The subassemblies of a DISOCONT Tersus system come pre-assembled on delivery, e.g. attached to the
scales or installed in a control cabinet.
NOTE: If you have purchased components, please read the DISOCONT Tersus BV-H2406 system
manual where you will find information on the installation dimensions and architecture of
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
5.2 Electrical Connections

The electrical connection for the DISOCONT Tersus is shown - depending on the scope of supply - in the
model circuit diagram or in the system-specific circuit diagrams.
Further information on the electrical properties and interfaces of the subassemblies can be found in the
DISOCONT Tersus system manual BV-H2406.
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning

Control of the mechanical components, the drives and the interconnection with the system controller can
best be checked with no bulk material in simulation [➙ 38] mode.

Commissioning
5.4 Setting the Speed Controller

The system has two independent speed controllers. They are set and checked in volumetric mode with no
bulk material.
Fig. 5: Helix weighfeeder speed controller in volumetric operation
P Feed rate setpoint SW Screw switcher and setpoint distribution
q0 Assumed loading in volumetric mode PI1 Screw 1 speed controller
nw Helix drive speed setpoint PI2 Screw 2 speed controller
nw1 Helix drive 1 speed setpoint VFD1 Output controller for screw 1
nw2 Helix drive 2 speed setpoint VFD2 Output controller for screw 2
n1 Actual speed helix drive 1 M Screw drive motor
n2 Actual speed helix drive 2 T Pulse tachometer
The screw switchover SW should be set using the upper and lower switch thresholds (P26.03 and P26.02 =
0) so that both screws are always running. The screw setpoint speed nw, sent to the two single speed set-
points nw1 and nw2, can be set by changing the setpoint P. The presets are available as service values
[➙ 33].

Commissioning
The interface to the drive (actuating variable output and speed measurement) should be set as follows.
No. Name Reference point for the setting
P05.04 DI: Speed Helix 1 Circuit diagram
P05.05 DI: Speed Helix 2 Circuit diagram
P27.08 HC1: Controller Magnitude Circuit diagram
P27.16 HC2: Controller Mag. Circuit diagram
P03.02 Nominal Speed Data sheet
P05.01 Pulses per Motorrevolution Data sheet
P26.02 Threshold High 0 for controller check

Connect as required
P26.03 Threshold Low 0 for controller check

Connect as required
P27.01 , P27.09 HC1: P-Component KP , HC2: P-Component KP As per the controller dynamics (see below)
P27.03 , P27.11 HC1: Lower Limit , HC2: Lower Limit Specification of the setpoint input for the ex-
P27.05 , P27.13 HC1: Offset , HC2: Offset ternal output controller.
In general, all parameters have the same val-
ue.
Tab. 24 : Relevant speed control parameter
The external output controllers VDFD 1/2 should be set so that

▪ an actuating variable of 20 mA corresponds to the maximum motor speed (usually 3000 r.p.m.);
▪ the voltage offset at lower speeds is set so that the motor will not overheat at low speeds but can still
produce sufficient torque;
▪ any existing speed controller or load compensation (slippage compensation) is switched off as it can
cause periodic oscillation in the cascading control circuit;
▪ the lower threshold and the offset of the DISOCONT Tersus actuating variable output (analog output
and output controller) are set so that the motor just begins rotation at this value. This point can be identi-
fied by setting the feed rate setpoint to zero and increasing the lower threshold until the motor begins to
rotate. An initial setting can be found using the range selected for the speed presets at the output con-
troller (0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA).
Monitor the transient oscillations of the controller circuit for jumps in setpoint of 10 % if the setpoint has dif-
ferent values over the entire adjustment range (nw = 0 … 100 %). This can be done using e.g. a graphic
representation in EasyServe. Jumps in the setpoint may not cause excessive oscillation. On the other hand,
the actual speed should rapidly reach its setpoint. The control behavior is set by means of the proportional
component of the controller (P27.01 and P27.09). The controller reset time does not usually require adapta-
tion.
Set the switchover thresholds (P26.03 and P26.02) to the values required for operation (Screw Switchover
[➙ 226]) once the controller has been set.

Further Adjustment and Maintenance
6 Further Adjustment and Maintenance

We recommend carrying out the following maintenance work.
Cause Action Remarks
Periodically, e.g. Analysis of the results of the Significant fluctuations or drift suggests measuring errors. If
monthly control measurements this should happen the mechanical system should be in-
spected closer. For assistance refer to: Adjustment
Functions [➙ 45]
Periodically, e.g. every Check tare and check for Notes on how to proceed: Adjustment Functions [➙ 45]
3 months force shunts Significant changes in the tare suggests force shunts.
Change of bulk material Setting the fill limits or the fill Notes on how to proceed: Adjustment Functions [➙ 45]
level setpoint Avoid overfilling the bin, as this can cause errors when mea-
suring the bin weight.
At the same time the bin must always contain an adequate
buffer of bulk material to ensure that the discharge screw
can be uniformly filled.
Annually or as specified Lubrication and control See the operating manuals for the mechanical systems and
in the operating ma- drives
nuals of the moving
parts.
Tab. 25 : Maintenance

Parameters
7 Parameters
The DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to each application via parameters. No special programing knowledge is
therefore necessary.
Fig. 6: Parameter sets
Parameter set Purpose Activation Preparation and Alteration
Active parameter set Complete parameter set Always active Using EasyServe, the soft-
Regulation of measuring ware the VHM operating
and control functions console or a web server
default settings Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Cannot be changed
Non-alterable basic set- meter set using EasyServe,
ting the software the VHM oper-
ating console [➙ 38] or a
web server
Backup set Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Only using EasyServe in
Pre-setting for a group of meter set using EasyServe, expert mode
applications or a setting the software the VHM oper-
stored during commis- ating console [➙ 38] or a
sioning web server
Tab. 26 : Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus
Note: parameters not required for an application can be faded out or declared 'read only' using EasyServe
in expert mode. EasyServe compiles a list of visible parameters that form an integral part of the system do-
cumentation. They, together with this manual, make up the relevant documentation of the control system for
an application. The parameter list in the operating manual contains all of the parameters, regardless of their
actual use in an application.

Parameters
In addition to the parameter set stored in the scales, we recommend that after commissioning you keep a
copy of the parameter set in a mass storage medium using EasyServe.
The parameters are arranged into blocks to for clarity. A parameter is uniquely identified by its block and
number within that block in the respective scales software version:
P01.03: block of parameters 1 → Parameter 3
Note: Each parameter also has a unique number (ID) with which it can be addressed over the serial inter-
face. This number can be seen as a tooltip in EasyServe when passing over the parameter and can be out-
put in the parameter printout.
Gaps can appear between block numbers and parameters within the blocks.
In rare cases, the number of a parameter may change.
7.1 Abbreviations
Source Description
FB Fieldbus
OP Operating panel
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
AI Analog Inputs
AO Analog Outputs
LS Logical signal for using internally available signals
Event Event. The reaction to the occurrence of an event can be configured.
W1 Warning 1 (requires acknowledgement)
W2 Warning 2 (does not require acknowledgement)
ALARM Alarm (requires acknowledgement)
IGNORE Ignore: do not show any event message, but switch the corresponding contact outputs
LC Load Cell
I Flow rate
v Belt velocity
VCU VCU 20100 system unit of DISOCONT Tersus. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VHM DISOCONT Tersus operating panel. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VMO The machine operating console for service work. Refer to the BV-H2488 manual for details.
Tab. 27 : Abbreviations frequently used in parameters

Parameters
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces

The internal software signals and signals sent externally through the interfaces are linked by means of pa-
rameters. The parameters governing the link are assigned to the logic signals and describe the origin or the
target of a signal.
The linking takes place in steps across several sections.
Step Task
1. Select the source, such as DI, DO, ..., ...

n/a means not assigned; i.e., the function does not have any direct interaction with its surroundings.
2. Selection of the control unit, such as VCUx or VMOx, ...

It only shows the control units preselected in the Hardware Modules block of parameters.
As many 3 VCU and 2 VMO can be assigned to one scale. Address switches are used to differentiate
between the units. Details on setting the address can be found in the system manual BV-H2406.
3. Select the channel number on the control unit, e.g. DI 1 ...
4. Select for the active signal the external signal level LOW or HIGH.
Tab. 28 : Step-by-step specification of signal links
The source parameter defines whether a more precise signal path setting is also necessary. The linking
parameters only offer technically meaningful interfaces.
Source Unit Channel Level Purpose
DI VCU1-VCU3 DI1-DI7 High, Low Binary input signals

VMO1-VMO2
FB
DO VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Binary output signals

VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5
AI VCU1-VCU3 AI1-AI2 Analog interface

VMO1-VMO2 AI1-AI3
AO VCU1-VCU3 AO1-AO4 Analog interface

VMO1-VMO2 AO1-AO3
LC VCU1-VCU3 LC1-LC2 Load cell interface
LS VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Internal by-pass of an output for local

VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5 operation
n/a The internal signal is not assigned to any interface. Input signals adopt automatically a state
that does not interfere with the program
flow.
FB Fieldbus, no additional details required Controlled by signals or fieldbus
OP VHM operating panel, no additional details required Controlled by operating panel entries
v Speed, no additional details required Link with an internal signal

Tab. 29 : Signal sources and their descriptions

Parameters
Source Type of internal signal
Unit Interface assembly for external signal exchange
Channel Designation of the channel in the unit
Level Identifier of the value of the external signal if the internal logical signal accepts the True value. You
can switch here between active high and active low signal levels, i.e. the value of the external sig-
nal can be inverted.
Tab. 30 : Meaning of the columns
Setting Binary input NAMUR input Binary output
Low Voltage = 0 V across the Current at the input > 3 mA High resistance, relay contact open
input terminals (sensor not covered)
High Voltage > 18 VDC across Current at the input < 1 mA Low resistance, relay contact closed
the input terminals (sensor covered)
Tab. 31 : The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal
Name Unit Source Channel Level
DI: External Event 1 DI VCU1 DI1 Low

Tab. 32 : Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel
The DI: External Event 1 signal is connected at input DI1 of VCU1. If the input is open (low), this is inter-
preted as logically True (or 1).
7.3 Configuring
Configuring Event Messages
The system monitors a range of both of its own operation and the peripherals. The reaction to a recognized
deviation, that is to say an event, is set by parameter. The parameters are used to assign to each event a
class that will determine this reaction.
Event class Description Impact on Acknowledgement Color on

Feeding required the VHM
Alarm ALARM Stopping feed operation, Yes Red

The scale will be turned off,
Cannot be switched on
Warning 1 W1 Feeder will continue to run Yes Orange
Warning 2 W2 Feeder will continue to run No Yellow

Only display as long as
the event is active
Ignore IG Feeder will continue to run - -

Tab. 33 : Event classes

Parameters
NOTE: An external binary output channel is set that may have been assigned to the event regard-
less of the event class.
A recently pending alarm- or warning 1-class event will be shown on the operating panel blinking and in
color. The blinking stops when acknowledged. Acknowledged event messages are cleared from the display
for currently pending events when the event is no longer pending. Each event is stored with a time-stamp in
the internal memory [➙ 31] for later analysis.
7.4 Parameter List
7.4.1 Parameter Overview

VSF20170-003 0952
01 - Hardware Modules
Number: Name Default Customer Sys ID
P01.01 [➙ 77] Analog Channel A10 AO2 (Analog Out 2) 5746
P01.02 [➙ 77] Analog Channel A11 AI2 (Analog In 2) 5747
P01.03 [➙ 77] VCU20100-Unit 2 NO 4211
P01.04 [➙ 77] VCU2: Analog Channel A10 NO 5771
P01.06 [➙ 77] Event: Communication A 4216
VCU20100-Unit 2
P01.07 [➙ 77] VCU20100-Unit 3 NO 4212
VCU20100-Unit 3
P01.11 [➙ 77] VHM RS485 Address 1 4221
P01.12 [➙ 77] VMO20100-Unit 1 NO 4222
VMO20100-Unit 1
P01.14 [➙ 77] VMO20100-Unit 2 NO 5834
VMO20100-Unit 2
02 - Dialog Behaviour
P02.01 [➙ 81] Language * DEUTSCH 4224

Parameters
P02.02 [➙ 81] Units * Metric 4225

P02.03 [➙ 81] Scale Name * DISOCONT Tersus VSF 6238
P02.04 [➙ 81] Access Rights Limitation HMI * NO 4801
P02.05 [➙ 81] Remote IP Address HMI 1 * 192.168.240.21 4798
P02.06 [➙ 81] Event: Communication HMI 1 * IG 4218
P02.11 [➙ 81] Event: Communication VHM seri- IG 4804
al *
P02.12 [➙ 81] Password * 10000 4292
P02.13 [➙ 81] 2. Password * 14389 4321
P02.14 [➙ 81] Reset Counter 1 * active 4286
P02.15 [➙ 81] Reset Counter 2 * active 4287
P02.16 [➙ 81] Switch Grav./Vol. command * active 4595
P02.17 [➙ 81] Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode * active 4282
P02.18 [➙ 81] Filling control bin weigher * active 4598
P02.19 [➙ 81] Data Log ON/OFF * Password 4309
P02.20 [➙ 81] Exit Scale * active 4600
03 - Feeder Definition
P03.01 [➙ 86] Nominal Flow Rate * 10000 kg/h 4226
P03.02 [➙ 86] Nominal Speed * 3000 1/min 4643
P03.03 [➙ 86] Flow Rate Units * ------ kg/h 4229
P03.04 [➙ 86] Counter 1 Unit * ------- kg 4230
P03.05 [➙ 86] Pulse Length Total * 0.05 s 4231
P03.06 [➙ 86] Counter 2 Unit * ----.-- t 4232
P03.07 [➙ 86] Counter 3 Unit * -----.- t 4233
P03.08 [➙ 86] DO: Pulse Counter * n/a 4239
P03.09 [➙ 86] Totalizer Increment * 0 kg 4254

Parameters
04 - Control Sources
P04.01 [➙ 89] Feeder Start * FB 4241
P04.02 [➙ 89] Feedrate Setpoint * FB 4242
P04.03 [➙ 89] Setpoint Range * 20 mA 4243
P04.04 [➙ 89] Setpoint Offset * 4 mA 4244
P04.05 [➙ 89] Source Run Enable * n/a 4245
P04.06 [➙ 89] Event: Run Disabled * W2 4246
P04.07 [➙ 89] Source Relative Setpoint * n/a 6233
P04.08 [➙ 89] Relativer Setpoint Range * 20 mA 6240
P04.09 [➙ 89] Relative Setpoint Offset * 4 mA 6241
05 - Rated Data
P05.01 [➙ 91] Pulses per Motorrevolution * 10 Imp 4642
P05.02 [➙ 91] LC Characteristic Value * 2 mV/V 4257
P05.03 [➙ 91] LC Rated Capacity * 100 kg 4258
P05.04 [➙ 91] DI: Speed Helix 1 * DI 4310
P05.05 [➙ 91] DI: Speed Helix 2 * DI 4311
P05.06 [➙ 91] LC: Load Discharge * LC 4312
06 - Feeder control
P06.01 [➙ 92] Volumetric Start-Up 0s 4272
P06.02 [➙ 92] Afterflow Measurement Time 3s 4274
P06.03 [➙ 92] Start-Up Mode Q MIN 4276
P06.04 [➙ 92] Zero Drop-Out Active NO 4679
P06.05 [➙ 92] Zero Drop-Out Limit 1%Q 4680
07 - Feeder Monitoring
P07.01 [➙ 93] Event: Stand-By W2 4289
P07.02 [➙ 93] Stand-By Limit Value 0 % Io 4290
P07.03 [➙ 93] Event: Tachometer Input A 4291
P07.04 [➙ 93] Event: Error LC Input A 4293

Parameters
P07.05 [➙ 93] Event: LC Input < MIN A 4294

P07.06 [➙ 93] Event: LC Input > MAX A 4295
P07.07 [➙ 93] Event: Setpoint Limited W1 4296
P07.08 [➙ 93] Event: Power Failure A 4297
P07.09 [➙ 93] Time Deviation 20 s 4298
P07.10 [➙ 93] Threshold Deviation 5% 4299
P07.11 [➙ 93] Factor Deviation 1 4320
P07.12 [➙ 93] Deviation abs. max. 100 % 6255
P07.13 [➙ 93] Event: Deviation A 4300
P07.14 [➙ 93] Event: Memory A 4302
P07.15 [➙ 93] Event: Analog Input < Offset A 5418
08 - Filters
P08.01 [➙ 98] Filter: Actual Flow Rate 3s 4328
P08.02 [➙ 98] Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog 3s 4329
P08.03 [➙ 98] Display Load Outlet 3s 4326
P08.04 [➙ 98] Display Speed 3s 4637
P08.05 [➙ 98] Filter: Deviation 3s 4333
09 - Limit Values
P09.01 [➙ 99] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN 5 % Io 4337
P09.02 [➙ 99] Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN W1 4338
P09.03 [➙ 99] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX 120 % Io 4339
P09.04 [➙ 99] Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX W1 4340
P09.05 [➙ 99] Limit: Load MIN 60 % Q 4341
P09.06 [➙ 99] Event: Load MIN W1 4342
P09.07 [➙ 99] Limit: Load MAX 120 % Q 4343
P09.08 [➙ 99] Event: Load MAX W1 4344
P09.09 [➙ 99] Speed-Min Value 0%n 4630
P09.10 [➙ 99] Event: Speed-Min W1 4632
P09.11 [➙ 99] Speed-Max Value 120 % n 4633

Parameters
P09.12 [➙ 99] Event: Speed-Max W1 4635
10 - Calibration Data
P10.01 [➙ 102] LC Filter 0.25 s 4334
P10.02 [➙ 102] Calibration Time 300 s 4358
P10.03 [➙ 102] Controller Magnitude Volum 5 mA 4319
P10.04 [➙ 102] Nominal Load Outlet 70 kg 4314
P10.05 [➙ 102] Norming Factor Feedrate 0.002 4315
P10.06 [➙ 102] Range Correction 1 4352
P10.07 [➙ 102] Basic Tare 0 kg 4355
P10.08 [➙ 102] Tare Correction 0 kg 4356
11 - Analog Outputs
P11.01 [➙ 104] AO: Setpoint n/a 4385
P11.02 [➙ 104] Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4386
P11.03 [➙ 104] Setpoint Range 20 mA 4387
P11.04 [➙ 104] AO: Actual Flow Rate n/a 4388
P11.05 [➙ 104] Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 4389
P11.06 [➙ 104] Flow Rate Range 20 mA 4390
P11.07 [➙ 104] AO: Helix Load n/a 4316
P11.08 [➙ 104] Helix Load Offset 4 mA 4317
P11.09 [➙ 104] Helix Load Range 20 mA 4318
P11.10 [➙ 104] AO: Helix Speed n/a 4602
P11.11 [➙ 104] Helix Speed Offset 4 mA 4603
P11.12 [➙ 104] Helix Speed Range 20 mA 4604
P11.13 [➙ 104] AO: Deviation n/a 4397
P11.14 [➙ 104] Deviation Offset 4 mA 4398
P11.15 [➙ 104] Deviation Range 20 mA 4399
12 - Digital Inputs
P12.01 [➙ 107] Event: External Event 1 A 4417

Parameters
P12.02 [➙ 107] DI: External Event 1 DI 4418

P12.03 [➙ 107] Event: External Event 2 A 4430
P12.04 [➙ 107] DI: External Event 2 n/a 4431
P12.05 [➙ 107] Event: External Event 3 IG 4730
P12.07 [➙ 107] Event: External Event 4 IG 4732
P12.09 [➙ 107] DI: Acknowledge Events n/a 4419
P12.10 [➙ 107] DI: Local Mode n/a 4420
P12.11 [➙ 107] DI: Volumetric Mode n/a 4421
P12.12 [➙ 107] DI: Volumetric synchron n/a 4941
P12.13 [➙ 107] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 A 4409
P12.14 [➙ 107] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 A 4410
P12.15 [➙ 107] Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 IG 4411
P12.19 [➙ 107] DI: Reset Totalizer 1 n/a 5414
P12.20 [➙ 107] DI: Reset Totalizer 2 n/a 5415
13 - Digital Outputs
P13.01 [➙ 113] DO: Scale Start DO 4433
P13.02 [➙ 113] DO: Feeder Started n/a 4434
P13.03 [➙ 113] DO: ALARM n/a 4436
P13.04 [➙ 113] DO: Deviation n/a 4437
P13.05 [➙ 113] DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN n/a 4438
P13.06 [➙ 113] DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX n/a 4439
P13.07 [➙ 113] DO: Load MIN n/a 4440
P13.08 [➙ 113] DO: Load MAX n/a 4441
P13.09 [➙ 113] DO: Speed-MIN n/a 4631
P13.10 [➙ 113] DO: Speed-MAX n/a 4634
P13.11 [➙ 113] DO: Volumetric Mode n/a 4444

Parameters
P13.12 [➙ 113] DO: Local Mode n/a 4445

P13.13 [➙ 113] DO: WARNING n/a 4759
P13.14 [➙ 113] DO: Keyboard Mode n/a 4462
14 - Maintenance interval
P14.01 [➙ 116] Maintenance Electric 3000 h 4465
P14.02 [➙ 116] Event: Maint. Electric IG 4466
P14.03 [➙ 116] Maintenance Feeder Run 3000 h 4467
P14.04 [➙ 116] Event: Maint.Feeder Run IG 4468
15 - Communication EasyServe
P15.01 [➙ 117] Own Address 1 4520
P15.02 [➙ 117] Baud Rate 38400 4521
P15.03 [➙ 117] Format Data 8-N-1 6189
16 - Communication Fieldbus
P16.01 [➙ 117] Protocol Type NO 4528
P16.02 [➙ 117] Timeout Host 5s 4529
P16.03 [➙ 117] Event: Cyclic Communication A 4530
P16.04 [➙ 117] Event: Acyclic Communication W2 5680
P16.05 [➙ 117] Check in Keyboard Mode YES 6234
P16.06 [➙ 117] Compatibility DISOCONT Master NO 6287
P16.07 [➙ 117] Word Sequence I:std/L:std 6246
P16.08 [➙ 117] Byte Sequence High - Low 6245
P16.09 [➙ 117] Configuration FIXED_8_16 4661
P16.10 [➙ 117] Address 1 4531
P16.11 [➙ 117] Resolution 4096 4533
P16.12 [➙ 117] Baud rate 19200 4535
P16.13 [➙ 117] Data Format 8-O-1 4656
P16.14 [➙ 117] Physics RS232 6186
P16.15 [➙ 117] Address 16 4539
P16.16 [➙ 117] FLOAT-Format IEEE 4540

Parameters
P16.17 [➙ 117] Address 63 4541

P16.18 [➙ 117] Baud rate 125K 4542
P16.19 [➙ 117] Parameter NO 4658
P16.20 [➙ 117] Preset Count 2 4734
P16.21 [➙ 117] READ_ID Count 6 4659
P16.22 [➙ 117] Access Rights Limitation FB NO 4786
P16.23 [➙ 117] Remote IP Address FB 192.168.240.250 4787
17 - Ethernet
P17.01 [➙ 123] IP Address 192.168.240.1 6235
P17.02 [➙ 123] Net Mask 255.255.255.0 6236
P17.03 [➙ 123] Gateway 0.0.0.0 6237
18 - PLC Outputs
P18.01 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 1 n/a 4662
P18.02 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 2 n/a 4663
P18.03 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 3 n/a 4664
P18.04 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 4 n/a 4665
P18.05 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 5 n/a 4666
P18.06 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 6 n/a 4667
P18.07 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 7 n/a 4668
P18.08 [➙ 124] DO: PLC 8 n/a 4669
P18.09 [➙ 124] AO: PLC 1 n/a 4670
P18.10 [➙ 124] AO: PLC 2 n/a 4671
19 - Interlocking
P19.01 [➙ 126] DI: Event Mechanics 1 n/a 4760
P19.06 [➙ 126] DI: Event Electricity 1 n/a 4765

Parameters

P19.09 [➙ 126] DO: Event Mechanics n/a 4768
P19.10 [➙ 126] Event: Mechanics W1 4769
P19.11 [➙ 126] DO: Event Electricity n/a 4770
P19.12 [➙ 126] Event: Electricity W1 4771
P19.13 [➙ 126] DO: Event Mechatronics 1 n/a 4772
P19.14 [➙ 126] DO: Event Mechatronics 2 n/a 4773
P19.15 [➙ 126] Event: Mechatronics W1 4774
P19.16 [➙ 126] DO: Ready n/a 4775
P19.17 [➙ 126] Event: Not Ready W1 4776
P19.18 [➙ 126] DO: Ready for Start n/a 4777
P19.19 [➙ 126] Event: Not Ready for Start W1 4778
20 - Bin Weigher
P20.01 [➙ 129] Bin Weigher Active YES 4704
P20.02 [➙ 129] LC: Load Measurement LC 4705
P20.03 [➙ 129] LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4706
P20.04 [➙ 129] LC Rated Capacity 1000 kg 4707
P20.05 [➙ 129] LC Filter 0.25 s 4708
P20.06 [➙ 129] Bipolar Measurement NO 4712
P20.07 [➙ 129] Event: Error LC Input (Bin) W1 4709
P20.08 [➙ 129] Event: LC Input > MAX W1 4710
P20.09 [➙ 129] Nominal Bin Load 100 % LC 4711
P20.10 [➙ 129] Display Format ---.--- t 4672
P20.11 [➙ 129] Display Filter 3s 4713
P20.12 [➙ 129] Control Level MIN 60 % 4714
P20.13 [➙ 129] Control Level MAX 70 % 4715
P20.14 [➙ 129] DO: Bin Filling n/a 4716
P20.15 [➙ 129] Bin Level MIN 5% 4717
P20.16 [➙ 129] Event: Bin Level MIN W1 4718
P20.17 [➙ 129] DO: Bin Level MIN n/a 4719

Parameters
P20.18 [➙ 129] Bin Level MAX 120 % 4720

P20.19 [➙ 129] Event: Bin Level MAX W1 4721
P20.20 [➙ 129] DO: Bin Level MAX n/a 4722
P20.21 [➙ 129] AO: Bin Load n/a 4723
P20.22 [➙ 129] AO: Offset 4 mA 4724
P20.23 [➙ 129] AO: Range 20 mA 4725
P20.25 [➙ 129] Tare (Bin) 0 kg 4727
P20.26 [➙ 129] Calibration Weight 10 kg 4728
P20.27 [➙ 129] Controller in OFF-Mode YES 4755
P20.28 [➙ 129] DI: Bin Load Sensor n/a 5401
P20.29 [➙ 129] Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor W1 5402
P20.30 [➙ 129] DI: Control MAX-Sensor n/a 5606
P20.31 [➙ 129] Bin Level analog Input Offset 4 mA 4825
P20.32 [➙ 129] Bin Level analog Input Range 20 mA 4826
21 - Bin Level Controller

P21.01 [➙ 138] Bin Controller ON NO 4735
P21.02 [➙ 138] Filling Type YES 4736
P21.03 [➙ 138] AO: Controller Magnitude Bin n/a 4738
Level
P21.04 [➙ 138] DO: Feeder ON n/a 4758
P21.05 [➙ 138] Setpoint Bin Level 0 kg 4757
P21.06 [➙ 138] Feeder Constant 0 (kg/h)/mA 4741
P21.07 [➙ 138] Dead Time TT 3s 4742
P21.08 [➙ 138] P-Component KP 0 mA/kg 4739
P21.09 [➙ 138] I-Component TN 0s 4740
P21.10 [➙ 138] D Portion TV 0s 4747
P21.11 [➙ 138] D Filter TD 0s 4748
P21.12 [➙ 138] Bypass 10 mA 4743
P21.13 [➙ 138] Bypass D Portion 0s 4749
P21.14 [➙ 138] Controller Magnitude Offset 0 mA 4744
P21.15 [➙ 138] Lower Limit 0 mA 4745

Parameters
P21.16 [➙ 138] Upper Limit 20 mA 4746

P21.17 [➙ 138] Dead Band Deviation 0 kg 4750
P21.18 [➙ 138] Dead Band Factor 0 4751
P21.19 [➙ 138] Setpoint Filter 0.5 s 4752
P21.20 [➙ 138] Flow Rate Filter 0.5 s 4753
P21.21 [➙ 138] DI: Init. Controller n/a 4754
P21.22 [➙ 138] Bin Setpoint source PARAMETER 5476
22 - Check System
P22.01 [➙ 144] Type of Check System NO 4861
P22.02 [➙ 144] Check System Influence Bin + Helixoutlet 4785
P22.03 [➙ 144] Auto Correction NO 4903
P22.04 [➙ 144] Cyclic Auto Start NO 4862
P22.05 [➙ 144] Cycle Time 0.5 h 4863
P22.06 [➙ 144] Release Check System n/a 4864
P22.07 [➙ 144] Event: No Check Release W2 4884
P22.08 [➙ 144] Check Start Span OP 4865
P22.09 [➙ 144] Check Start Tare OP 4866
P22.10 [➙ 144] Accept Correction OP 4867
P22.11 [➙ 144] Finish Check Measurement OP 4868
P22.12 [➙ 144] Set: Quantity or Rotations Quantity 4869
P22.13 [➙ 144] Check Motor Rotations 500 4784
P22.14 [➙ 144] Check Quantity 10 % 4871
P22.15 [➙ 144] Storage Quantity 50 % 4872
P22.16 [➙ 144] Minimum Check Quantity 0% 4873
P22.17 [➙ 144] Event: Minimum Check Quantity W1 4874
P22.18 [➙ 144] Minimum Fill Weight 5% 4875
P22.19 [➙ 144] Event: Minimum Fill Weight W1 4876
P22.20 [➙ 144] Maximum Fill Weight 90 % 4877
P22.21 [➙ 144] Event: Maximum Fill Weight W1 4878
P22.22 [➙ 144] Damping Time 3s 4879
P22.23 [➙ 144] DO: Control Started n/a 4881

Parameters
P22.24 [➙ 144] Feeder Stopped n/a 4882

P22.25 [➙ 144] Event: Feeder Not Stopped W1 4883
P22.26 [➙ 144] Event: Prepare Check Measure- W2 4885
ment
P22.27 [➙ 144] DO: Check Measurement Active n/a 4887
P22.28 [➙ 144] Event: Expect Acceptance W2 4888
P22.29 [➙ 144] DO:Expect Acceptance n/a 4889
P22.30 [➙ 144] Absolute Range 10 % 4890
P22.31 [➙ 144] Relative Range 3% 4891
P22.32 [➙ 144] Event: Absolute Tare Correction W1 4892
Error
P22.33 [➙ 144] Event: Relative Tare Correction W1 4893
Error
P22.34 [➙ 144] Event: Absolute Span Correction W1 4894
Error
P22.35 [➙ 144] Event: Relative Span Correction W1 4895
Error
P22.36 [➙ 144] Correction Evaluation 1 4896
P22.37 [➙ 144] Correction Speed 0s 4897
P22.38 [➙ 144] AO: Check Measurement Result n/a 4898
P22.39 [➙ 144] DO: Check Gate n/a 4899
P22.40 [➙ 144] Check Gate Feedback n/a 4900
P22.41 [➙ 144] Check Gate Time 0s 4901
P22.42 [➙ 144] Event: Check Gate Error W1 4902
P22.43 [➙ 144] Limit Max. Bin Error 0% 4946
P22.44 [➙ 144] Event: Bin Error W1 4947
P22.45 [➙ 144] DO: Correction Error n/a 4904
P22.46 [➙ 144] Event: Correction MAX W2 5821
P22.47 [➙ 144] Evaluation Factor Gain 0.002 5822
P22.48 [➙ 144] Limit Gain 5% 5823
P22.49 [➙ 144] Event: Limit Gain W2 5824
P22.50 [➙ 144] Evaluation Factor Tare 0.002 5825
P22.51 [➙ 144] Limit Tare 5% 5826
P22.52 [➙ 144] Event: Limit Tare W2 5827

Parameters
23 - Moisture
P23.01 [➙ 161] Moisture Active NO 5386
P23.02 [➙ 161] Moisture Select n/a 5399
P23.03 [➙ 161] AI: Moisture Measurement n/a 5387
P23.04 [➙ 161] Nominal Moisture 20 % 5388
P23.05 [➙ 161] Moisture Offset 4 mA 5389
P23.06 [➙ 161] Moisture Range 20 mA 5390
P23.07 [➙ 161] DO: Moisture active n/a 5400
P23.08 [➙ 161] Moisture MAX 10 % 5391
P23.09 [➙ 161] DO: Moisture MAX n/a 5392
P23.10 [➙ 161] Event: Moisture MAX W1 5393
P23.11 [➙ 161] AO: Flow Rate corrected n/a 5394
P23.12 [➙ 161] AO: Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 5395
P23.13 [➙ 161] AO: Flow Rate Range 20 mA 5396
P23.14 [➙ 161] Pulse Counter corrected NO 5397
24 - Load Helixinlet
P24.01 [➙ 164] LC: Loadcell LC 5571
P24.02 [➙ 164] LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 5572
P24.03 [➙ 164] LC Rated Capacity 200 kg 5573
P24.04 [➙ 164] LC Filter 0.25 s 5575
P24.05 [➙ 164] Event: Error LC Input W1 5576
P24.07 [➙ 164] Tare (Inlet) 0 kg 5578
25 - Pressure Compensation
P25.01 [➙ 166] Compensation Active NO 5479
P25.02 [➙ 166] Compensation Source n/a 5480
P25.03 [➙ 166] Pressure Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 5481
P25.04 [➙ 166] Pressure Rated Cap. 0.5 Bar 5482
P25.05 [➙ 166] Filter Pressure Value DMS 0.25 s 5483

Parameters
P25.06 [➙ 166] Event: DMS-Input A 5484

P25.07 [➙ 166] Event: DMS-Input > MAX A 5485
P25.08 [➙ 166] Event: DMS-Input < MIN W1 5486
P25.09 [➙ 166] Zero 0 Bar 5487
P25.10 [➙ 166] Norming 0 kg/Bar 5488
P25.11 [➙ 166] Pressure-MIN 0% 5489
P25.12 [➙ 166] Event: Pressure-MIN W2 5490
P25.13 [➙ 166] DO: Pressure-MIN n/a 5491
P25.14 [➙ 166] Pressure-MAX 105 % 5492
P25.15 [➙ 166] Event: Pressure-MAX W2 5493
P25.16 [➙ 166] DO: Pressure-MAX n/a 5494
P25.17 [➙ 166] DI: Switch On Compensation n/a 5495
P25.18 [➙ 166] Compensation analog Input Offset 4 mA 5583
P25.19 [➙ 166] Compensation analog Input Ran- 20 mA 5584
ge
26 - Helix-Switch
P26.01 [➙ 171] active Helix Helix 1 and 2 5627
P26.02 [➙ 171] Threshold High 50 % 5585
P26.03 [➙ 171] Threshold Low 30 % 5586
P26.04 [➙ 171] Switch-Time 30 s 5587
P26.05 [➙ 171] DO: Helix 1 n/a 5588
P26.06 [➙ 171] DO: Helix 2 n/a 5589
P26.07 [➙ 171] DI: Helix 1 n/a 5812
P26.08 [➙ 171] DI: Helix 2 n/a 5813
P26.09 [➙ 171] Angle: Helix 1 - Helix 2 0 Grad 5814
27 - Helix-Controller
P27.01 [➙ 174] HC1: P-Component KP 0.04 mA/% 5590
P27.02 [➙ 174] HC1: I-Component TN 1s 5591
P27.03 [➙ 174] HC1: Lower Limit 0 mA 5592
P27.04 [➙ 174] HC1: Upper Limit 20 mA 5593

Parameters
P27.05 [➙ 174] HC1: Offset 0 mA 5594

P27.06 [➙ 174] HC1:Position at STOP 0 5595
P27.08 [➙ 174] HC1: Controller Magnitude AO 5597
P27.09 [➙ 174] HC2: P-Component KP 0.04 mA/% 5598
P27.10 [➙ 174] HC2: I-Component TN 1s 5599
P27.11 [➙ 174] HC2: Lower Limit 0 mA 5600
P27.12 [➙ 174] HC2: Upper Limit 20 mA 5601
P27.13 [➙ 174] HC2: Offset 0 mA 5602
P27.14 [➙ 174] HC2:Position at STOP 0 5603
P27.16 [➙ 174] HC2: Controller Mag. AO 5605
28 - Agitator Control
P28.01 [➙ 177] DO: Agitator 1 Left n/a 5612
P28.02 [➙ 177] DO: Agitator 1 Right n/a 5613
P28.03 [➙ 177] DI: Limit Switch 1 Left n/a 5614
P28.04 [➙ 177] DI: Limit Switch 1 Right n/a 5615
P28.05 [➙ 177] DO: Agitator 2 Left n/a 5808
P28.06 [➙ 177] DO: Agitator 2 Right n/a 5809
P28.07 [➙ 177] DI: Limit Switch 2 Left n/a 5810
P28.08 [➙ 177] DI: Limit Switch 2 Right n/a 5811
P28.09 [➙ 177] Min. Waiting Period 5s 5616
P28.10 [➙ 177] Setpoint dependent Period 0s 5617
P28.11 [➙ 177] Weight Threshold 100 % 5618
P28.12 [➙ 177] Active by Filling NO 5619
P28.13 [➙ 177] Delay reversing 2s 5630
P28.14 [➙ 177] DI: Overload 1 n/a 5818
P28.15 [➙ 177] DI: Overload 2 n/a 5819
P28.16 [➙ 177] Event: Agitator Overload W1 5820
29 - Safety Functions
P29.01 [➙ 180] Safety activation: Option code n/a 7091
P29.02 [➙ 180] Source Emergency Setpoint n/a 4930

Parameters
P29.03 [➙ 180] Emergency Setpoint 0 kg/h 4931

P29.04 [➙ 180] Setpoint Step + 300 % Io 4932
P29.05 [➙ 180] Setpoint Step - 300 % Io 4933
P29.06 [➙ 180] Setpoint Factor 1 4934
P29.07 [➙ 180] If OFF: Reset Setpoint NO 4939
P29.08 [➙ 180] Feeder Check FC NO 4956
P29.09 [➙ 180] FC: Tolerance at 100% 40 % 4959
P29.10 [➙ 180] FC: Tolerance at 50% 20 % 4960
P29.11 [➙ 180] FC: Tolerance at 0% 20 % 4961
P29.12 [➙ 180] Event: FC-MIN Limit W1 4964
P29.13 [➙ 180] Event: FC-MAX Limit A 4965
P29.14 [➙ 180] DO: FC-MAX Limit n/a 4966
P29.15 [➙ 180] DO: FC-MIN Limit n/a 5398
30 - Fixed mode configuration

P30.01 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 1 320 6247
P30.02 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 2 352 6248
P30.03 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 3 384 6249
P30.04 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 4 592 6250
P30.05 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 5 0 6251
P30.06 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 6 0 6252
P30.07 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 7 0 6253
P30.08 [➙ 184] ID Preset Value 8 0 6254
P30.09 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 1 752 6256
P30.10 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 2 784 6257
P30.11 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 3 1552 6258
P30.12 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 4 1872 6259
P30.13 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 5 1874 6260
P30.14 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 6 1876 6261
P30.15 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 7 1890 6262
P30.16 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 8 1894 6263
P30.17 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 9 816 6264

Parameters
P30.18 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 10 2192 6265

P30.19 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 11 2194 6266
P30.20 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 12 1904 6267
P30.21 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 13 0 6268
P30.22 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 14 0 6269
P30.23 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 15 0 6270
P30.24 [➙ 184] ID Read Value 16 0 6271
31 - FCB analog outputs

P31.01 [➙ 187] FCB_AO 01 n/a 20481
P31.02 [➙ 187] Offset FCB_AO 1 4 mA 6272
P31.03 [➙ 187] Range FCB_AO 1 20 mA 6273
P31.04 [➙ 187] Reference FCB_AO 1 1000 6274
P31.05 [➙ 187] FCB_AO 02 n/a 20482
P31.06 [➙ 187] Offset FCB_AO 2 4 mA 6275
P31.07 [➙ 187] Range FCB_AO 2 20 mA 6276
P31.09 [➙ 187] FCB_AO 03 n/a 20483
P31.10 [➙ 187] Offset FCB_AO 3 4 mA 6278
P31.11 [➙ 187] Range FCB_AO 3 20 mA 6279
P31.13 [➙ 187] FCB_AO 04 n/a 20484
P31.14 [➙ 187] Offset FCB_AO 4 4 mA 6281
P31.15 [➙ 187] Range FCB_AO 4 20 mA 6282
P31.17 [➙ 187] FCB_AO 05 n/a 20485
P31.18 [➙ 187] Offset FCB_AO 5 4 mA 6284
P31.19 [➙ 187] Range FCB_AO 5 20 mA 6285
32 - FCB digital outputs

P32.01 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 01 n/a 20529

Parameters
P32.02 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 02 n/a 20530

P32.03 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 03 n/a 20531
P32.04 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 04 n/a 20532
P32.05 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 05 n/a 20533
P32.06 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 06 n/a 20534
P32.07 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 07 n/a 20535
P32.08 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 08 n/a 20536
P32.09 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 09 n/a 20537
P32.10 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 10 n/a 20538
P32.11 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 11 n/a 20539
P32.12 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 12 n/a 20540
P32.13 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 13 n/a 20541
P32.14 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 14 n/a 20542
P32.15 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 15 n/a 20543
P32.16 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 16 n/a 20544
P32.17 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 17 n/a 20545
P32.18 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 18 n/a 20546
P32.19 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 19 n/a 20547
P32.20 [➙ 191] FCB_DO 20 n/a 20548
33 - Data Logging
P33.01 [➙ 195] Hourly Total Time 0 min 5743
P33.02 [➙ 195] Daily Total Time 0 min 5744
P33.03 [➙ 195] Logger cycle time 1 min 6288
P33.04 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 1 752 6289
P33.05 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 2 755 6290
P33.06 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 3 1872 6291
P33.07 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 4 1874 6292
P33.08 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 5 1876 6293
P33.09 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 6 2326 6294
P33.10 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 7 1886 6295

Parameters
P33.11 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 8 1890 6296

P33.12 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 9 2192 6297
P33.13 [➙ 195] Data Log Value 10 2194 6298
34 - Configuration HMI Values

P34.01 [➙ 197] HMI Value 01 1894 6299
P34.02 [➙ 197] HMI Value 02 1872 6300
P34.03 [➙ 197] HMI Value 03 1874 6301
P34.04 [➙ 197] HMI Value 04 2326 6302
P34.05 [➙ 197] HMI Value 05 1886 6303
P34.06 [➙ 197] HMI Value 06 2182 6304
P34.07 [➙ 197] HMI Value 07 2184 6305
P34.08 [➙ 197] HMI Value 08 2186 6306
P34.09 [➙ 197] HMI Value 09 1950 6307
P34.10 [➙ 197] HMI Value 10 2076 6308
35 - Bin Weigher Adaption

P35.01 [➙ 198] Helix Load (Calibration) 70 kg 5828
P35.02 [➙ 198] Bin Load (Calibration) 100 % LC 5829
P35.03 [➙ 198] Bin Adaption Factor 0 5830
P35.04 [➙ 198] Limit MIN 0.5 5831
P35.05 [➙ 198] Limit MAX 2 5832
7.4.2 Parameter Details
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules

A DISOCONT Tersus system can comprise up to a maximum of 3 VCU control units, several VHM (OP)
operating panels and up to 2 motor controllers (VMO). A PC running the EasyServe program can be con-
nected for service purposes.
With the exception of EasyServe and the operating elements (VHM, OP) all of the units involved must be
signed on with the parameters in group P01.xx. Units that are not signed on cannot be used and their inputs
and outputs will not be made available by either EasyServe or the operating elements.
Furthermore, up to 2 analog input or output components (VAI or VAO) can be installed.

Parameters
Caution:
For reasons of safety, it is imperative that the relevant communication error messages should register an
alarm (A) when originating from units that are actively involved in the control loop.
P01.01 Analog Channel A10 Default: AO2 (Analog Out 2)

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel set at position A10 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.
AIx: analog input VAI installed
AOx: analog output installed
x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.02 Analog Channel A11 Default: AI2 (Analog In 2)

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel set at position A11 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.
P01.03 VCU20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 2 and VIO
software.
P01.04 VCU2: Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A10 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.

Parameters

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A11 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.
P01.06 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 2
Event Group: SY Number: 02
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.
P01.07 VCU20100-Unit 3 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 3 and VIO
software.

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A10 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed

Parameters

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A11 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed
P01.10 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 3
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.
P01.11 VHM RS485 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 16
The parameter defines the address under which the VHM operating element can reach the
scale via RS485 coupling.
P01.12 VMO20100-Unit 1 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The first unit VMO 201xx is connected to the local bus. The address 11 must be set by
parameter for this unit.
P01.13 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 1
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.

Parameters
P01.14 VMO20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Second VMO 201xx unit is connected to the local bus. The address 12 must be set by pa-
rameter for this unit.
P01.15 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 2
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour

The parameters of this group define system behavior towards the operator and set access authorization.
P02.01 Language Default: DEUTSCH

Alternative: DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
Device dialog language. User-defined texts can be used if OTHER is selected. Texts can
be written and loaded using EasyServe.
P02.02 Units Default: Metric

Alternative: Metric
English
Switches display and parameter entry units from metric (SI units) to non-metric systems
(English). All values entered will be converted automatically.

Parameters
P02.03 Scale Name Default: DISOCONT Tersus VSF
Letters and characters can be used. The name appears in the upper row of the operating
console and when searching through networks for controllers.
Remark: The characters ";" and "=" are not accepted. During the saving procedure these
characters will automatically be deleted.
P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI Default: NO

Alternative: NO
REMOTE IP
The rights for controlling the scales from the operating console VHM or the user interface of
a browser (HMI) connected via Ethernet can be restricted. The restricted rights apply to the
start and stop commands and the setpoint entry.
Alternatives:
NO: control commands are permitted from all operating locations
REMOTE IP: control commands are possible only from the operating console with the IP
address listed in the following parameters.
Also refer to:

P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1
...
P02.10 Event: Communication HMI 3
P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1 Default: 192.168.240.21
Address of the first operating panel from which control commands should be given.
The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or
P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via RS485.
Also refer to:

P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI

Parameters
P02.06 Event: Communication HMI 1 Default: IG

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.
Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s.
To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
Address of the second operating panel from which control commands are to be given.
Also refer to:


Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.
The address of the third operating element that control commands are supposed to be giv-
en from.
Also refer to:


Parameters

Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
P02.11 Event: Communication VHM serial Default: IG

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operat-
ing panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
P02.12 Password Default: 10000

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 1 for access protection of certain functions on the operator panel as per the fol-
lowing parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the 2nd
password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password keyed in is
shown encoded for protection. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 7353

Parameters
P02.13 2. Password Default: 14389

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 2 for access protection for certain functions on the operator panel as per the
following parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the
2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password entered is
shown encoded on the screen. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 2889
P02.14 Reset Counter 1 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.15 Reset Counter 2 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.16 Switch Grav./Vol. command Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.17 Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password

Parameters
P02.18 Filling control bin weigher Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.19 Data Log ON/OFF Default: Password

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Enables functions Start Data Logging , Stop Data Logging and Clear Data Log File.
Parameters see block Data Logging.
P02.20 Exit Scale Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for the function at the operator panel.
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition

The parameters of this group configure basic functionality.
P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate Default: 10000 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
The nominal flow rate is a characteristic value of the scale that acts as a reference value for
threshold values and service displays.
P03.02 Nominal Speed Default: 3000 1/min

Min: 0 1/min Max: 500000 1/min
Effective only when P05.04 DI: Speed Helix 1 or P05.05 DI: Speed Helix 2 = DI...
Reference value for displays and for threshold value messages.

Parameters
P03.03 Flow Rate Units Default: ------ kg/h

Alternative: ------ kg/h
----.- kg/h
---.-- kg/h
--.--- kg/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
----.-- kg/min
Display format for setpoint and actual feed rate values.
P03.04 Counter 1 Unit Default: ------- kg

Alternative: ------- kg
-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Display format for counter 1.
P03.05 Pulse Length Total Default: 0.05 s

Min: 0 s Max: 10 s
Duration of an external totalizing counter output impulse.
The weighting of a pulse is defined by P03.09 Totalizer Increment.
If the impulse duration is shorter than 10 ms the impulse output is disabled. All impulses not
issued yet are cleared.
The output frequency f is approximately Nominal Flow Rate:

f [Hz] = P03.01 / (3600 * P03.09)
The output frequency must be ≤ 10 Hz if an external counter is connected.

Parameters
P03.06 Counter 2 Unit Default: ----.-- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Display format for counter 2
P03.07 Counter 3 Unit Default: -----.- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Display format for counter 3.
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
DO: Selecting the physical output for triggering an external pulse counter for the measured
quantity. Bear in mind the limitations on speed and life cycle when selecting a relay output
and set the weight equivalent for a pulse in P03.09 Totalizer Increment. The duration of the
impulse is set by P03.05 Pulse Length Total.
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000 kg
Weight equivalent of an impulse at the output for the external counter as per P03.08 DO:
Pulse Counter.
The DO: Pulse Counter is blocked when setting the valence '0'.

Parameters
7.4.2.4
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources
The parameters of this group assign internal signals to the physical outputs.
P04.01 Feeder Start Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
DI
Specifies the device that will turn on the scales.
The digital input is flank-controlled, i.e., the ON signal must be removed and then reapplied
if the scale becomes inoperative because of something like an alarm.
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
AI
Determines which signal input gives the flow rate setpoint.
P04.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Min: 0 mA Max: 1000 mA
Input current for the analog setpoint of 100 % of the Nominal Flow Rate.
The range and offset parameters take effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set
to AI.
P04.04 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Min: -200 mA Max: 200 mA
Input current offset for an analog setpoint of 0 % of Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter takes effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.

Parameters
P04.05 Source Run Enable Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Determines the signal input that gives the scales release signal. This input is generally
used for interlocking with downstream transport equipment.
The setting 'n/a' means that no release is required.
P04.06 Event: Run Disabled Default: W2

Event Group: IL Number: 01
No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched
on.
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
OP
AI
A preset feed rate setpoint (compare P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint) can be percentaged by the
VHM operating console or by an analog input. This function is used if the system is to feed
a percentage of an additional material to the original component.
For example:
P04.02 = AI
P04.07 = OP
The effective setpoint is the percentage component, entered into the operating console, of
the absolute setpoint set through the analog input.
If the setpoint is given as per P04.02 by the operating console (P04.02 = OP) or the scales
are in keyboard mode P04.07 will have no effect, i.e. the setpoint entered at the operating
console works as entered.
P04.08 Relativer Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for entry 100%.

Parameters
P04.09 Relative Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for an input of 0%.
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated

Rated Data
The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics.
P05.01 Pulses per Motorrevolution Default: 10 Imp

Min: 0 Imp Max: 1000000 Imp
Number of impulses of the tachometer per revolution of the feeder drive motor.
Also refer to:

P05.04 DI: Speed Helix 1
P05.02 LC Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V

Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V
Characteristic value (transfer factor) of the load cell(s) at the discharge point
P05.03 LC Rated Capacity Default: 100 kg

Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the load cell rated loads for determining weight at the discharge point.
P05.04 DI: Speed Helix 1 Default: DI VCU1.DI6 High

Alternative: DI
n/a
Definition of the input channel for measurement of the speed of discharge screw 1.
P05.05 DI: Speed Helix 2 Default: DI VCU1.DI7 High

Alternative: DI
n/a
Definition of the input channel for measurement of the speed of discharge screw 2.

Parameters
P05.06 LC: Load Discharge Default: LC VCU1.LC1

Alternative: LC
n/a
Definition of the input channel for weight measurement at the discharge point.
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control

The parameters of this group describe the control functions of the basic functionality.
P06.01 Volumetric Start-Up Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
Length of time it takes to begin volumetric operation once the scales have been switched
on. If selected, feeding will switch to gravimetric operation once the startup time has past.
This function improves the startup with an empty feeder.

The DISOCONT Tersus speed controllers are also active during startup.
P06.02 Afterflow Measurement Time Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 2000 s
When the feeder is shut off, the feedrate calculation and totalization continues for this pe-
riod of time to also measure material still in motion.
P06.03 Start-Up Mode Default: Q MIN

Alternative: Q MIN
FAST
This parameter can be used to optimize startup behavior.
Q MIN: Startup will switch from volumetric startup mode to normal gravimetric operation if
P09.05 Limit: Load MIN is exceeded.
FAST: The setpoint for the controller is set to the nominal feed rate (P03.01 Nominal Flow
Rate) in this mode, increasing the speed of the discharge screw. Operation is switched
from startup to normal mode if one of the following conditions is fulfilled.
a) Q > Q MIN (P09.05 Limit: Load MIN)
b) the feed rate measured exceeds the setpoint

Parameters
P06.04 Zero Drop-Out Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The measuring value is set to 0 if the load at the discharge point is lower than the value set
P09.05 Limit: Load MIN. Feed rate and material quantity will no longer be recorded. The
Zero Drop Out is of use only for beltweighers with discharge control, not for weighfeeders.
P06.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit Default: 1 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 10 % Q
Recording the total is suppressed with measurements within this limit around the zero point
to ensure that the counter remains constant when the belt is idle.
No feature appears on the display.
Reference: Nominal Belt Load (service value)
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring

This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm
(A) and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2).
P07.01 Event: Stand-By Default: W2

Event Group: SC Number: 02
Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller
than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched
off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value Default: 0 % Io

Min: 0 % Io Max: 100 % Io
If the controller magnitude is below the threshold value, the feed drive is switched off to
protect the motor from overheating.
Also refer to: P07.01 Event: Stand-By

Parameters
P07.03 Event: Tachometer Input Default: A

Event Group: CA Number: 02
The signals at one of the feeder drive's impulse tachometer inputs are outside of the speci-
fied range.
Possible reasons:
- there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wiring).
- the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
See also:
P07.04 Event: Error LC Input Default: A

The load cell cable for the weight measurement point is improperly connected, not con-
nected or has been broken. The load cell may be faulty.
Steps to be taken:
- check the cabling and the load cell
- check the load cell
- if the cabling and the load cell are intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched
on even after the error has been rectified.
P07.05 Event: LC Input < MIN Default: A

Event Group: LO Number: 01
The load cell load at the discharge point is less than 3% of the sum of the load cell rated
loads.
Possible reasons:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Parameters
P07.06 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: A

Event Group: HI Number: 01
The load cell load at the discharge point is greater than 110% of the sum of the load cell
nominal loads.
Measuring range end:

125% for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175% for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited Default: W1

Cause of the event:

Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in volume-
tric operation.
P07.08 Event: Power Failure Default: A

Event Group: WE Number: 01
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically regardless of the event class. The event must
first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales will restart.

Parameters
P07.09 Time Deviation Default: 20 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Duration for which a control deviation above the threshold in P07.10 Threshold Deviation
will be tolerated. The event 'control deviation' is identified once the time has been ex-
ceeded.
Simultaneously P07.09 Time Deviation functions as a time constant for the filter that con-
tains the value of the control deviation. A 'control deviation' event is also identified if the
filtered result exceeds the threshold value P07.12 Deviation abs. max..
Also refer to:

P07.10 Threshold Deviation
P07.11 Factor Deviation
P07.12 Deviation abs. max.
P07.13 Event: Deviation
P07.10 Threshold Deviation Default: 5 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum permissible control deviation.
Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate.
Also refer to: P07.09 Time Deviation, P07.13 Event: Deviation
P07.11 Factor Deviation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
An event message as per P07.13 Event: Deviation will be identified if the absolute value of
the control deviation for the duration P07.09 Time Deviation is greater than the threshold
P07.10 Threshold Deviation.
With a setpoint of 100%, the effective threshold is always determined by the parameter
P07.10 Threshold Deviation. For lower setpoints the threshold can be reduced with para-
meter P07.11 Factor Deviation.
Examples:
P07.11 = 0 : Effective threshold = P07.10 × Setpoint / P03.01
P07.11 = 1 : Effective threshold = P07.10

Parameters
P07.12 Deviation abs. max. Default: 100 %

Min: 0.1 % Max: 1000 %
The amount of the control deviation will be filtered (filter time constant: P07.09 Time Devia-
tion). If the filter output exceeds the limit set here a 'control deviation' event will be identified
(P07.13 Event: Deviation). The filter is reset when the scales are switched off.
P07.13 Event: Deviation Default: A

Maximum control deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the
setpoint over too long a period of time.
Possible reasons:
- material has been incorrectly handled
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
The density of the bulk material is outside of the specified range.
- the controller has at times been at its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor Check the output regula-
tor settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical value that
minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable operation.
- false compensation of tensile forces in the discharge area
P07.14 Event: Memory Default: A

The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during
that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.

Parameters
P07.15 Event: Analog Input < Offset Default: A

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input sig-
nal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters

The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the
time set if there is an abrupt change in the signal.
Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display.
P08.01 Filter: Actual Flow Rate Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display and for outputs of the actual flow rate at the operating
element, EasyServe and fieldbus. Has no effect on the feeder regulation.
P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the 'actual flow rate' analog output. The filter can have an impact on
the control characteristics with an externally closed control circuit through the analog value.
P08.03 Display Load Outlet Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for all displays and outputs of the load at the discharge point. Has no
effect on controller behavior.
P08.04 Display Speed Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for all displays and printouts of the motor speed.

Parameters
P08.05 Filter: Deviation Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for all displays and printouts of the control deviation.
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values

The parameters of this group define the limits for process values and specify the event classes of the asso-
ciated events.
Events that can only occur with regular feed operation are only monitored 10 s after beginning feed opera-
tion.
P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: 5 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Lower threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: W1

The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too low
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: 120 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Upper threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate

Parameters
P09.04 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: W1

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too large
P09.05 Limit: Load MIN Default: 60 % Q

Min: -10 % Q Max: 200 % Q
Threshold value for loading at the discharge point.
Reference value: P10.04 Nominal Load Outlet
P09.06 Event: Load MIN Default: W1

Loading at the discharge point has underrun the lower threshold value.
Possible reasons:
- the feed hopper is empty
- arching in the feed hopper
- bulk material density lower than specified
- force shunts or erroneous tensile forces
P09.07 Limit: Load MAX Default: 120 % Q

Min: -10 % Q Max: 200 % Q
Threshold value for loading at the discharge point.
Reference value: P10.04 Nominal Load Outlet

Parameters
P09.08 Event: Load MAX Default: W1

Loading at the discharge point has exceeded the upper threshold value.
Possible reasons:
- bulk material density greater than specified
P09.09 Speed-Min Value Default: 0 % n

Min: -10 % n Max: 200 % n
Speed threshold value.
Reference value: P03.02 Nominal Speed

See also: P13.09 DO: Speed-MIN
P09.10 Event: Speed-Min Default: W1

The motor speed of the feed helix is below Speed-Min Value.
Possible reasons:
- Extreme high material density
- Material flushing through the feed helix
- Feedrate setpoint very small
P09.11 Speed-Max Value Default: 120 % n

Min: -10 % n Max: 200 % n
Speed threshold value.
Reference value: Reference value: P03.02 Nominal Speed

See also: P13.10 DO: Speed-MAX

Parameters
P09.12 Event: Speed-Max Default: W1

Speed of the feeder drive exceeds the limit set in Speed-Max Value.
Possible reasons:
- the discharge screw has been filled poorly
- extremely low bulk material weight
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data

The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values
that have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No
readjustment is necessary.
P10.01 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value
should be left at the factory setting.
Note: filtering the load cell signal also effects the regulating action.
P10.02 Calibration Time Default: 300 s

Duration of the adjustment program.
P10.03 Controller Magnitude Volum Default: 5 mA

Determination of the actuating variable for running the adjustment program 'CV: Volumetric
Discharge Adaptation'.
The size of the actuating variable influences the duration of the adjustment program as the
it must run for at least 10 screw rotations. The duration can be reduced by increasing the
adjustment actuating variable.
At least 5 % of the maximum actuating variable should be aimed for for the adjustment.

Parameters
P10.04 Nominal Load Outlet Default: 70 kg

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 1000000 kg
Reference for threshold values and percentaged displays of loading at the discharge point.
P10.05 Norming Factor Feedrate Default: 0.002

Min: 0.000001 Max: 1000000
Conversion factor for the product of the load at the discharge point times the speed of the
discharge element in terms of feed rate. This factor takes into account the density of the
bulk material and the geometry of the feeder.
It is used by the adjustment program for adjusting the feed rate.
See also (appendix):

- controller block diagram
- calculation of the factor from the density of the bulk material and the geometry of the
feeder.
P10.06 Range Correction Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
Correction factor for the relationship between the measured and the actual feed rate.
The parameter affects the feed rate measurement I proportionally.

I(corrected) = I(measured) × range correction
The value is calculated and set by the correction factor via the control hopper during a con-
trol.
P10.07 Basic Tare Default: 0 kg

The result of the TW: Tare calibration program in accordance with the dead weight without
the flow of bulk solids.
P10.08 Tare Correction Default: 0 kg

Min: -1000000 kg Max: 1000000 kg
The results of the >0< Zero Set calibration program or automatic zero setting.

Parameters
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Analog Outputs

The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels.
Using the DISOCONT Tersus VCU 20104 controller only one analog channel is available and it is set to
feedrate feedback by default.
P11.01 AO: Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the flow rate set value.
Also refer to: P11.02 Setpoint Offset, P11.03 Setpoint Range
P11.02 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the flow rate set value of 0 %.
Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
Also refer to: P11.01 AO: Setpoint
P11.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of a flow rate set value of 100 %.
Also refer to: P11.01 AO: Setpoint
P11.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the actual flow rate.
Also refer to: P11.05 Flow Rate Offset, P11.06 Flow Rate Range

Parameters
P11.05 Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 0 %.
Also refer to: P11.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P11.06 Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 100 %.
Also refer to: P11.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P11.07 AO: Helix Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the weight of the screw measured at the discharge point.
See also: P11.08 Helix Load Offset, P11.09 Helix Load Range
P11.08 Helix Load Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for a screw loading value of 0%.
Reference: P10.04 Nominal Load Outlet
See also: P11.07 AO: Helix Load

Parameters
P11.09 Helix Load Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for a screw loading value of 100%.
Reference: P10.04 Nominal Load Outlet
See also: P11.07 AO: Helix Load
P11.10 AO: Helix Speed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for discharge screw speed (average of both speeds for feeders with
two screws).
See also: P11.11 Helix Speed Offset, P11.12 Helix Speed Range
P11.11 Helix Speed Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for a screw speed of 0%.
Reference: P03.02 Nominal Speed
See also: P11.11 Helix Speed Offset
P11.12 Helix Speed Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for a screw speed of 100%.
Reference: P03.02 Nominal Speed
See also: P11.11 Helix Speed Offset

Parameters
P11.13 AO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the control deviation.
See also: P11.14 Deviation Offset, P11.15 Deviation Range
P11.14 Deviation Offset Default: 4 mA

The value of the control deviation 'zero' lies between the offset and 20 mA.
Also refer to: P11.13 AO: Deviation
P11.15 Deviation Range Default: 20 mA

The output current is calculated according to the following formula:
Current = 10 mA + (P11.14)/2 + (P11.15 - P11.14) × control deviation / 100 %
Reference value: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Digital Inputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input
channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard
wired on the controller and cannot be changed.
P12.01 Event: External Event 1 Default: A

External interference signal at fault input 1.
Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive

Parameters
P12.02 DI: External Event 1 Default: DI VCU1.DI1 Low

Alternative: DI
n/a
Input 1 for an external interference signal.
The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking).
Also refer to: P12.01 Event: External Event 1
P12.03 Event: External Event 2 Default: A

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
P12.04 DI: External Event 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P12.05 Event: External Event 3 Default: IG


Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI
P12.07 Event: External Event 4 Default: IG


Alternative: n/a
DI
P12.09 DI: Acknowledge Events Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for acknowledging event messages.
Caution: the level is static and may not be on permanently (otherwise continuous acknowl-
edgement).

Parameters
P12.10 DI: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Feedback from the local operating console VLG that has been switched to 'local'.
The DISOCONT Tersus is now a passive display device only. It is switched to 'volumetric'
automatically to suppress event messages. The DISOCONT Tersus switches itself off when
it is switched back.
P12.11 DI: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for switching the scales to volumetric operation, not synchronized with previous
operation.
P12.12 DI: Volumetric synchron Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Switches to volumetric operation while the actuating variable continues continuously. The
actuating variable is calculated as an average of the actuating variable obtained during
regular operation. Alterations to the feed rate setpoint automatically adjust the actuating
variable.
Also refer to: P12.11 DI: Volumetric Mode
P12.13 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 Default: A

The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level.
Possible cause:
- cable to the sensor is broken
- the sensor is faulty
- there is a short circuit in the cable connection
- an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level

Parameters
P12.14 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 Default: A

Possible cause:
P12.15 Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 Default: IG

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Parameters

Possible cause:

Possible cause:
P12.19 DI: Reset Totalizer 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for canceling totalizing counter 1. The positive flank is the actuator.
P12.20 DI: Reset Totalizer 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for clearing totalizing counter 2. The positive flank takes effect.

Parameters
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Outputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output
channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P13.01 DO: Scale Start Default: DO VCU1.DO1 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
Sends a start command to the feeder's main drive.
P13.02 DO: Feeder Started Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output signal used to display the ON or OFF scales states.
P13.03 DO: ALARM Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if any alarm is triggered (common alarm). The scales have
failed.
P13.04 DO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the monitoring activates the control deviation
(P07.13 Event: Deviation).
This contact output is independent of the event class.
P13.05 DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if the feed rate falls below the minimum feed rate (P09.01
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN).
The contact output is independent of the event class.

Parameters
P13.06 DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the maximum feed rate (P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX) is exceeded.
P13.07 DO: Load MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if the minimum loading at the discharge point (P09.05
Limit: Load MIN) is underrun.
P13.08 DO: Load MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if the maximum loading at the discharge point (P09.07
Limit: Load MAX) is exceeded.
P13.09 DO: Speed-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the motor speed underruns its lower limit P09.09 Speed-Min
Value.
The output is independent of the event class setting.

Parameters
P13.10 DO: Speed-MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the motor speed exceeds its upper threshold value
P09.11 Speed-Max Value.
The output is independent of the event class setting.
P13.11 DO: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to a volumetric mode.
P13.12 DO: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to local mode.
P13.13 DO: WARNING Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if any warning is pending.
P13.14 DO: Keyboard Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when keyboard mode is preselected.
(The DISOCONT Tersus is operated using the operating console VHM or EasyServe).

Parameters
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Maintenance interval

The parameters in this group define the maintenance intervals.
P14.01 Maintenance Electric Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the power supply. This parameter defines the interval between maintenance work.
Also refer to: P14.02 Event: Maint. Electric
P14.02 Event: Maint. Electric Default: IG

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P14.01
Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.
P14.03 Maintenance Feeder Run Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the scales (scales ON). This parameter defines the interval between maintenance
work.
Also refer to: P14.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run
P14.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run Default: IG

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P14.03 Main-
tenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.

Parameters
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Communication

Communication EasyServe
The parameters of this group define the parameters for serial communication with EasyServe via RS232 or
RS485. These parameters have no function if EasyServe is connected via Ethernet.
P15.01 Own Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485.
All devices connected to the communicatio bus must have disjunct addresses.
Also refer to: P15.02 Baud Rate, P15.03 Format Data
P15.02 Baud Rate Default: 38400

Alternative: 38400
Data transfer speed. This parameter is used for information only. The speed cannot be
changed.
P15.03 Format Data Default: 8-N-1

Alternative: 8-N-1
Formats the serial data. The value is used for information only and cannot be altered.
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Communication Fieldbus

The parameters of this group define the communication procedure to be used to a higher-level plant control
system and configure the data link.
Details on the fieldbus interface can be found in the following manuals:

DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468

Parameters
P16.01 Protocol Type Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Modbus-RTU
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Modbus-TCP
Ethernet/IP
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card. Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual BV-H2406. The
manual Data Communication BV-H2448 contains further details on the data structures.
NO: MODBUS/TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
MODBUS: Modbus RTU protocol; RS232-, RS422- or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface
card VSS 28020 must be installed.
PROFIBUS DP: fieldbus interface card VPB 28020 must be installed.
DEVICE NET: Fieldbus interface card VCB 28020 must be installed.
MODBUS/TCP: Complete communication (read/write) using ethernet and the main VCU
RJ45 plug.
ETHERNET/IP: Communication via Ethernet and the RJ45 plug on the main VCU.
The red-coded RJ45 socket X96 may not be used for communication with the host comput-
er.
P16.02 Timeout Host Default: 5 s

Min: 1 s Max: 600 s
Monitors the interface
A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in
P16.02 is greater than zero.

Parameters
P16.03 Event: Cyclic Communication Default: A

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been inter-
rupted for longer than the timeout-period in P16.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
P16.04 Event: Acyclic Communication Default: W2

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
P16.05 Check in Keyboard Mode Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
To be able to use keyboard mode as emergency operation if coupling fails (without having
to log off the fieldbus coupling), this parameter can be used
to deactivate fieldbus communication monitoring in keyboard mode.
This allows the scales to be operated even if the fieldbus link fails.
P16.06 Compatibility DISOCONT Master Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Compatibility setting for the predecessor electronics systems DISOCONT or INTECONT
PLUS.
NO: Not completely compatible

YES: compatible, but with restricted data link compatibility for new functions

Parameters
P16.07 Word Sequence Default: I:std/L:std

Alternative: I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word.
I → denotes IEEE 754 values (floating-point values)

L → denotes LONG values (4 byte integer values)
std → will not swap the word order
swp → will swap the word order
P16.08 Byte Sequence Default: High - Low

Alternative: High - Low
Low - High
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.
P16.09 Configuration Default: FIXED_8_16

Alternative: NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
FIXED_8_8
FIXED_4_4
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
FIXED COMPATIBLE
Configuration of the data in the transfer protocol.
See the data communication manual (BV-H2448) for details.
'Variable' formats:
NO_PARA_ID_3_6: parameters are not transferred, 3 control values, 6 query values
NO_PARA_ID_4_12: parameters are not transferred, 4 control values, 12 query values
PARA_ID_6_15: parameters are transferred, 6 control values, 15 query values
VARIABLE_COMPATIBLE: variable format compatible with DISOCONT
'Fixed' formats:
FIXED_8_16: 8 control values, 16 query values
FIXED_COMPATIBLE: fixed data compatibility mode (8 control values, 16 query values)

Parameters
P16.10 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Address of the device as a slave at the modbus.
Each address may be used at a bus once only.
P16.11 Resolution Default: 4096

Min: 1 Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value trans-
ferred.
The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
P16.12 Baud rate Default: 19200

Alternative: 9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
Data transfer rate at Modbus-RTU.
P16.13 Data Format Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
Modbus-RTU always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Example: 8-O-1 means:

1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit
N = No parity
O = Odd parity
E = Even parity
P16.14 Physics Default: RS232

Alternative: RS485-2-wire
RS485-4-wire
RS232
Selects the electrical interface type (Modbus RTU)

Parameters

Min: 0 Max: 126
Address of the slave at the PROFIBUS
P16.16 FLOAT-Format Default: IEEE

Alternative: IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parame-
ters.

Min: 0 Max: 63
The address of the weighing electronics on DeviceNet
P16.18 Baud rate Default: 125K

Alternative: 125K
250K
500K
Data transfer rate of the DeviceNet.
P16.19 Parameter Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P16.20 Preset Count Default: 2

Min: 2 Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order
plant control system.

Parameters
P16.21 READ_ID Count Default: 6

Min: 0 Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales→ master) that are
queried in a telegram.
P16.22 Access Rights Limitation FB Default: NO

Alternative: NO
FIRST WRITE
REMOTE IP
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a
controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights.
The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P16.23
Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
P16.23 Remote IP Address FB Default: 192.168.240.250
IP address of the subscriber with control rights for Modbus-TCP.
Also refer to: P16.22 Access Rights Limitation FB
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Ethernet

The parameters in this group control the Ethernet ports. It is necessary to provide inputs when EasyServe, a
DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating element or a host computer is supposed to be connected via Ethernet.
For DISOCONT Tersus you can find information on the selection of addresses in the BV-H2406 manual.
P17.01 IP Address Default: 192.168.240.1
IP address of the weighing electronics. If the control system is integrated into an Ethernet
network, the address must be chosen in agreement with the network administrator. In iso-
lated networks we recommend the factory setting 192.168.240.x. "x" allows for selection of
the system on the bus.

Parameters
P17.02 Net Mask Default: 255.255.255.0
The net mask setting is based on the local network type.

In general the following setting is used: 255.255.255.0
For DISOCONT Tersus see also: P17.02 Net Mask, system manual BV-H2406
P17.03 Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0
Generally no input is required. Typical value: 0.0.0.0
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - PLC Outputs

Applicable only when physical DISOCONT Tersus outputs are controlled by the control system.
The DISOCONT Tersus allows physical output signals to be controlled directly by the control system com-
puter via fieldbus. The parameters of this group assign physical channels to the fieldbus commands.
Please also refer to: status of fieldbus protocol commands in manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communica-
tion' (BV-H2448).
P18.01 DO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.

Alternative: n/a
DO
Corresponds to P18.01 DO: PLC 1

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO
P18.09 AO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.

Parameters
P18.10 AO: PLC 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P18.09 AO: PLC 1
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block

Block 19 - Interlocking
The parameters of this group configure the system's predefined events and running messages.
Also refer to the interlocking logic circuit diagram in the appendices
P19.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
P19.06 DI: Event Electricity 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
P19.09 DO: Event Mechanics Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P19.10 Event: Mechanics Default: W1

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.

Parameters
P19.11 DO: Event Electricity Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P19.12 Event: Electricity Default: W1

P19.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P19.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P19.15 Event: Mechatronics Default: W1

P19.16 DO: Ready Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters
P19.17 Event: Not Ready Default: W1

P19.18 DO: Ready for Start Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P19.19 Event: Not Ready for Start Default: W1

7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Bin Weigher

In addition to the weighfeeder, the system supports weighing and bin level control of an additional hopper.
This hopper is often a control hopper for the continuous weighfeeder.
P20.01 Bin Weigher Active Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Simulation
The bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales.
It has the following functions:
1. displaying the bin weight
2. registering and monitoring threshold values
3. regulating the (min/max) level
4. the check scale for the check system
It can also be filled via menu.
The continuous fill level can also be regulated via block Bin Level Controller.
P20.01 = Simulation:
Bin regulation and min/max regulation are simulated.
The continuous scale draws off material and filling is done with 4 × P03.01.

Parameters
P20.02 LC: Load Measurement Default: LC VCU1.LC2

Alternative: LC
n/a
FB
AI
Definition of the measuring channel
If FB or AI are selected the external value will be converted to a value with mV/V units that
corresponds to a measurement from a load cell. The following signal processing calculates
weight in kg from the signal in mV/V and is identical for all input types.
Also refer to:

P20.02 LC: Load Measurement
P20.03 LC Characteristic Value
If AI is selected, refer also to:

P20.31 Bin Level analog Input Offset
P20.32 Bin Level analog Input Range

Transfer factor of the load cell as per the data sheet. All load cells have to have the same
nominal value.
Also refer to: P20.04 LC Rated Capacity

Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the bin's load cell rated capacities. All load cells must have the same rated data.
Special case of a partially-weighed bin:

If a bin is only supported x % by load cells at WZnominal1 nominal load sum and is other-
wise supported on non-weighed supports (fixed bearings), the load cell rated capacity to be
entered is given by
P20.04 = WZnenn1 × 100 % / x %
If the percentage component x % on the load cell is not known a priori, the nominal value is
determined by externally weighing one bin level.
Also refer to: P20.03 LC Characteristic Value

Parameters

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Time constant of the load cell filter.
The load cell filter affects all measuring load related measuring values.
P20.06 Bipolar Measurement Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Switches the measuring range for the load cell amplifier.
NO: measurement can be made in one load direction only

YES: the load cell can measure both compression and tensile forces
As there is generally always an initial load on the load cell it is usually sufficient to analyze
the signal in the direction of compression only. The YES setting is needed in rare special
cases only, e.g. if a measuring eye is used to record weight.
Bipolar measurement reduces the resolution of the measuring signal.
P20.07 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) Default: W1

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The
load cell may be faulty.
Steps to take :
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched
on even after the error has been rectified.

Parameters
P20.08 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: W1

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P20.09 Nominal Bin Load Default: 100 % LC

Min: 0 % LC Max: 1000 % LC
The nominal bin level is the reference value for threshold values and analog outputs. It is
given as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P20.04 LC Rated Capacity).
P20.10 Display Format Default: ---.--- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Select the dimension and the decimal places for displays.
P20.11 Display Filter Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Time constant of the filter for displaying the weight value.
The filter applies to the display and to the analog or serial printout but not for threshold
values or control contacts.

Parameters
P20.12 Control Level MIN Default: 60 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using MIN and MAX levels (output P20.14 DO: Bin Filling).
Switched on if the bin level underruns the MIN level and switched off again when the MAX
level is reached.
Reference value: P20.09 Nominal Bin Load
See also: P20.13 Control Level MAX
P20.13 Control Level MAX Default: 70 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using the MIN and MAX control levels (output P20.14 DO:
Bin Filling). If the fill level drops below MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again
when it reaches MAX.
Also refer to: P20.12 Control Level MIN
P20.14 DO: Bin Filling Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output to start the filling procedure.
The output is set to 'do not fill' each time a scales alarm is triggered.
Also refer to: P20.12 Control Level MIN, P20.13 Control Level MAX
P20.15 Bin Level MIN Default: 5 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
MIN threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P20.16 Event: Bin Level MIN, P20.17 DO: Bin Level MIN

Parameters
P20.16 Event: Bin Level MIN Default: W1

The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
Also refer to: P20.15 Bin Level MIN
P20.17 DO: Bin Level MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output signal 'bin level too low'.
The output becomes active if the fill level underruns the lower threshold value. It operates
independent of the event class of the corresponding event.
P20.18 Bin Level MAX Default: 120 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
Max threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P20.19 Event: Bin Level MAX, P20.20 DO: Bin Level MAX
P20.19 Event: Bin Level MAX Default: W1

The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
Also refer to: P20.18 Bin Level MAX

Parameters
P20.20 DO: Bin Level MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output in case the hopper fill level exceeds the upper threshold.
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
P20.21 AO: Bin Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the hopper fill level.
Also refer to: P20.22 AO: Offset, P20.23 AO: Range
P20.22 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for a bin weight of 0 %.
See also:
P20.21 AO: Bin Load
P20.23 AO: Range
P20.09 Nominal Bin Load
P20.23 AO: Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for a fill weight of 100 %.
See also: P20.21 AO: Bin Load, P20.22 AO: Offset

Parameters

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter is used to correct the measuring result. It is set automatically by the calibra-
tion program CB: Weight Check'.
The measuring result is corrected using the factor in P20.24.
P20.25 Tare (Bin) Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The tare is calculated automatically by the calibration program TW: Tare' and set into this
parameter.
P20.26 Calibration Weight Default: 10 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Used to enter the test weights used for the calibration program CB: Weight Check.
P20.27 Controller in OFF-Mode Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter defines whether the filling weight control (P20.12 Control Level MIN, P20.13
Control Level MAX, P20.14 DO: Bin Filling) and bin regulation (block: bin level controller)
are always active or only when the scale is switched on.
P20.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for a bin load sensor. The probe has the function of keeping the bin from over-
flowing. If the sensor is activated, filling is discontinued for 60 seconds or is aborted.
- output as per P20.14 DO: Bin Filling to OFF
- output as per P21.04 DO: Feeder ON to OFF
- controller magnitude (P21.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level) to 0 and controller in
base position
Filling is aborted regardless of the filling source (regulator, controller, manual)
and the event class (P20.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor).

Parameters
P20.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor Default: W1

Event Group: CO Number: 04
The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shut-
ting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P20.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjust-
ment of the calculation of the flow rate.
P20.30 DI: Control MAX-Sensor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Filling will be stopped and event Event: Bin Load MAX Sensoridentified if this input be-
comes active.
Also refer to:

P20.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor
P20.13 Control Level MAX
P20.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor
P20.31 Bin Level analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

Raising the analog input for the bin fill level of the additional bin
The input current corresponding to a signal of 0 mV/V.

Effective only when P20.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (such as analog and field-
bus) for DMS inputs'
P20.32 Bin Level analog Input Range

Parameters
P20.32 Bin Level analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The sensitivity adjustment of the analog input for weighing the additional bin
Converting the analog value into the voltage signal corresponding to a load cell:
The measured value [mV/V] = (input current – P20.31) / (P20.32 – P20.31) * P20.03
where:
P20.31 = Bin Level analog Input Offset
P20.32 = Bin Level analog Input Range
P20.03 = LC Characteristic Value
Effective only when P20.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (such as analog and field-
bus) for DMS inputs'
P20.31 Bin Level analog Input Offset
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Bin Level Controller

This continuous controller keeps the fill level in the bin at the setpoint level.
Precondition: weight measurement of the separate bin has been activated (P20.01 Bin Weigher Active =
YES).
Digital control of the separate bin filling can be found in the Bin Weigher block.
Details on the controller and the controller block diagram can be found in the appendix.
P21.01 Bin Controller ON Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates the continuous controller for the fill level of the additional bin.
Also refer to: P20.01 Bin Weigher Active

Parameters
P21.02 Filling Type Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the standard direction.
YES: The controlled organ fills the bin.

NO: The controlled organ empties the bin.
P21.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Output signal for the fill level controller actuating variable.
P21.04 DO: Feeder ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output channel for switching on the continuous feed element (control element).
The output is set to off, the controller magnitude is set to 0 and the controller is put into the
base position with every scale alarm. The automatic check system (KME) does the regulat-
ing during its measuring phase.
P21.05 Setpoint Bin Level Default: 0 kg

Setpoint for the hopper in normal operation.
P21.06 Feeder Constant Default: 0 (kg/h)/mA

Min: 0 (kg/h)/mA Max: 1000000 (kg/h)/mA
Proportional constant of the conveyor element. The parameter designates the flow rate for
a current of 1 mA at the output P21.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level.
P21.07 Dead Time TT Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Transport times between the regulated conveyor element (control element) and the bin if
the transporting feeder element has a fixed conveying speed.

Parameters
P21.08 P-Component KP Default: 0 mA/kg

Min: 0 mA/kg Max: 10000 mA/kg
Proportional component of the fill level controller.
An I controller results at KP = 0 that leads to a control circuit with an instable structure with
this regulation. This setting should therefore be avoided.
P21.09 I-Component TN Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the controller integral component for the bin fill level. The integral component
reaches the same magnitude during this period as the proportion with a constant control
deviation.
The integral component is switched off at P21.09 I-Component TN = 0.
P21.10 D Portion TV Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Differential component of the bin fill level controller.
The differential component is switched off if P21.10 D Portion TV = 0.
P21.11 D Filter TD Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Filter time constant for the differential component.
This value should not be greater than the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3 * P21.10 is normal.
Also refer to: P21.10 D Portion TV

Parameters
P21.12 Bypass Default: 10 mA

Constant for pilot control of the conveyor into a bin that is emptied by the continuous scale.
This constant describes the current as a controller magnitude that produces a flow rate at
the conveyor bin corresponding to the nominal flow rate (P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate) of the
continuous scale.
The bypass is adjusted so that the fill level of the bin is retained (outflow = inflow) if the
controller is switched off (P21.08 P-Component KP, P21.09 I-Component TN, P21.10 D
Portion TV = 0) and the scale is switched on.
The bypass can be changed in small increments until the service value yBi oscillates
around 0, even if the controller is active.
(The designs with different signs apply correspondingly to P21.02 Filling Type = NO.)
P21.13 Bypass D Portion Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
In critical circumstances such as with a small hopper or long dead time, the D portion for
the bypass can relieve the controller if there are large changes in weighfeeder setpoints.
The control deviation time interval can be minimized.
Recommendation: 0 under normal circumstances and approximately TT/2 (P21.07 Dead
Time TT) under critical circumstances
P21.14 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA

Increase of the actuating variable for the conveyor element.
In general parameters P21.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P21.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.
P21.15 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Internal lower threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
In general parameters P21.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P21.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.

Parameters
P21.16 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

Upper threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
P21.17 Dead Band Deviation Default: 0 kg

The effective control deviation Xd(w) at the controller input can be reduced by the factor of
P21.18 Dead Band Factor within a range of ± P21.17 Dead Band Deviation. This can bring
about more settled (slower) control in the stable state (near the setpoint) for the bin weight
with malfunctions in the weight signal.
P21.18 Dead Band Factor Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 1
Factor for the control deviation for a fill level close to the setpoint.
Also refer to: P21.17 Dead Band Deviation
P21.19 Setpoint Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
The setpoint filter for the fill level setpoint.
This can prevent overshoot with setpoint changes effected by the check system (KME).
P21.20 Flow Rate Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
Time constant for the filter in the fill level actual value. Rapid control reaction requires a low
time constant.
The value set is automatically taken into account by the calibration program BIN: Controller
Optimization'.
P21.21 DI: Init. Controller Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Contact initializes all parts of the controller that store information. Bypass and increase only
are active as long as this is applied.

Parameters
P21.22 Bin Setpoint source Default: PARAMETER

Alternative: PARAMETER
FB
This parameter defines whether the fill level setpoint is given by parameter P21.05 Setpoint
Bin Level or by the fieldbus interface (ID: hex 0x0266 or dec 614).

Parameters
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Check System

The check system controls and corrects a continuous scales using the change in bin weight; the changes in
weight result only from the bulk material passing over continuous scales. During measurement all other in-
and outflows must be stopped.
A signals flow chart for control can be found in the appendix.
P22.01 Type of Check System Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Single Unit
Continuous System
Extern
Automatic
Selects the control concept
NO:
No check system
Single unit:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin form a mechanical unit and are
weighed together. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Separated Units:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin are decoupled both mechanically and
with regards to weighing. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Filling system:
The continuous weighfeeder fills the control bin during the check.
External:
The control procedure is controlled by a higher-order system. The DISOCONT Tersus only
supplies the relevant measured values.
The following parameters only are effective:
- P22.27 DO: Check Measurement Active
- P22.30 Absolute Range
- P22.31 Relative Range
The following parameter description relates primarily to the single unit and separated units
types.
The appendix has a flow chart.

Parameters
P22.02 Check System Influence Default: Bin + Helixoutlet

Alternative: Bin
Bin + Helixoutlet
Bin+Helixout.+Inlet
Definition of the weighing points used to calculate the total weight of the system for a con-
trol measurement. The difference in total weight is a gauge for the bulk material fed during
one unit of time.
Bin:
The total weight is calculated from the loads on the load cells at the hopper only. This set-
ting is useful for test purposes only.
Bin + helix outlet:

The total weight is the sum of the loads on the load cells at the hopper and the measuring
point at the screw discharge.
Bin + helix outlet + inlet:

The total weight is the sum of the loads on the load cells at the hopper, the measuring point
at the screw discharge and the measuring point at the screw inlet. Select this setting if the
measuring point at the screw inlet rests on a non-weighed part. Select the setting 'bin +
helix outlet' if the support is connected to the hopper.
P22.03 Auto Correction Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Setting for the correction unit once measurement is finished.
NO: Correction must be started manually

YES: Correction is performed automatically if the correction result lies within the set thre-
sholds (P22.30 Absolute Range, P22.31 Relative Range).

Parameters
P22.04 Cyclic Auto Start Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Tare
Span
Automatic start of the check system.
NO:
No automatic start
Tare:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting tare or additive effects of errors.
Span:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting the proportionality factor between the meas-
ured value and actual flow rate. Correction of multiplicatively acting effects of errors.
It starts after a pause preselected with the parameters P22.05 Cycle Time. It also makes
sense to preselect automatic correction (P22.03 Auto Correction = YES).
P22.05 Cycle Time Default: 0.5 h

Min: 0.01 h Max: 100 h
With automatic start selected, the standby time between the end of one check and the start
of the next.
Also refer to: P22.04 Cyclic Auto Start
P22.06 Release Check System Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
Defines the input that will activate a check by the system controller.
If no active signal given:

1. no check will be started
2. a running check will be canceled.
The setting 'n/a' makes the check system continuously active.

Parameters
P22.07 Event: No Check Release Default: W2

Event Group: CH Number: 09
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized
one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing
authorization.
P22.08 Check Start Span Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Start the on-stream calibration system to determine scales errors with multiplicative effects
(range errors), and to correct them if necessary.
Errors with multiplicative effects can originate from non-uniform bulk material transport in
the discharge screw.
The check can only be performed during a running feed. An active check will be interrupted
if feeding is stopped.
P22.09 Check Start Tare Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Start the on-stream calibration system to determine scales errors with additive effects (tare
errors), and correct them if necessary.
Tare errors are primarily the result of material deposits and interference forces acting on
the weighing system and should be corrected frequently.
The check can only be performed during a running feed. An active check will be interrupted
if feeding is stopped.

Parameters
P22.10 Accept Correction Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determine the signal source for correction of the continuous scales on the basis of the out-
come of the check system.
Once measurement has ended the check system moves to the acknowledgement phase
and waits for the correcting command, when P22.03 Auto Correction = NO. Corrections can
also by made manually if the tolerances P22.30 Absolute Range or P22.31 Relative Range
have been exceeded. Correction is triggered by the input flank.
P22.11 Finish Check Measurement Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determines the source of the signal for canceling a running check. The command acts in all
phases of measurement. The calibration of the continuous scale is not changed by the
cancellation. The input is flank-controlled.
The check must be canceled if the measuring system is in acknowledgement phase and if
the control outcome is not to be used to correct the continuous scales.
P22.12 Set: Quantity or Rotations Default: Quantity

Alternative: Quantity
Revol.
Specify the duration of a check.
Quantity:
The check is performed across the bulk material quantity set by P22.14 Check Quantity.
Revol.:
The check is performed across the number of revolutions of the discharge screw set by
P22.13 Check Motor Rotations.

Parameters
P22.13 Check Motor Rotations Default: 500

Min: 0 Max: 1000000
Duration of the control measurement, expressed as 'number of count impulses from the
discharge screw drive's impulse tachometer'. On the one hand, this number should be set
high. On the other, the hopper must contain a sufficient quantity of bulk material for the
number selected.
See also: P22.12 Set: Quantity or Rotations
P22.14 Check Quantity Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
The quantity of bulk solids that should be discharged as a check.
The quantity selected should be large enough to minimize the effects of errors when deter-
mining the control quantity. By the same token the hopper should have sufficient capacity
for the control quantity.
P22.15 Storage Quantity Default: 50 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level for the start of a check. Before mea-
surement is performed, if required, the hopper will be filled either to this level or at minimum
to the level determined by P20.13 Control Level MAX.
Preconditions:
1. The storage quantity must be smaller than the max. control fill level: P22.15 < P22.20
Maximum Fill Weight.
If this condition is not met, the check will end after starting with the message CH 03 (max.
check fill level).
2. The storage quantity must be greater than the sum of the check quantity, the min. check
fill level and a safety quantity: P22.15 Storage Quantity > P22.14 Check Quantity + P22.18
Minimum Fill Weight + MT
If this condition is infringed the fill level will fall below the min. control fill level during the
check. The measurement would then cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level).
MT = losses caused by the settling time P22.22 Damping Time.

Parameters
P22.16 Minimum Check Quantity Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Only effective if P22.12 Set: Quantity or Rotations = 'Revol.'
Weight of bulk material that must be discharged during the check in order for the results of
the check to be meaningful.
P22.17 Event: Minimum Check Quantity Default: W1

During the check the quantity of bulk material discharged over a set number of screw revo-
lutions was lower than the lower threshold value (P22.16 Minimum Check Quantity).
Possible cause:
- weight of the bulk material fed was beneath the specified range
- the number of revolutions was set too low for a check.
P22.18 Minimum Fill Weight Default: 5 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Bulk material buffer that must remain in the hopper during a check so that the flow charac-
teristics and the material density at the feeding point do not change significantly.
The measurement would cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level) if the ma-
terial quantity falls below this amount.

Parameters
P22.19 Event: Minimum Fill Weight Default: W1

The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P22.18 Minimum Fill Weight during a
check. The controlling measurement is finished prematurely.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density higher than specified
- unfavorable settings in P22.14 Check Quantity, P22.13 Check Motor Rotations, P22.18
Minimum Fill Weight or P22.15 Storage Quantity
P22.20 Maximum Fill Weight Default: 90 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
The maximum check fill weight is the greatest fill level allowed during a check. The measur-
ing period will not begin until the fill level falls below this value.
The permissible operating range of the control measurement within the bin fill level is de-
termined by the two threshold values Min P22.18 Minimum Fill Weight and Max P22.20
Maximum Fill Weight.
P22.21 Event: Maximum Fill Weight Default: W1

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is fi-
nished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P22.15 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill
level (P22.20 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts. In case
of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
P22.22 Damping Time Default: 3 s

The waiting period from switching off filling to starting the control measurement. The
process variables should stabilize within this period. This time is also observed even if the
bin was not filled shortly beforehand.

Parameters
P22.23 DO: Control Started Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message 'control active'.
The signal is active from the start of the control until successful correction or cancellation.
P22.24 Feeder Stopped Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
The 'On/Off' feedback from the filling element. The settling time (P22.22 Damping Time)
starts with the Off signal when the check has started. The check will wait for the feedback
signal (the P22.25 Event: Feeder Not Stopped event) before starting the settling time if
filling is switched on.
The check will be canceled without a response if the conveying element On feedback is
received after starting settling time.
P22.25 Event: Feeder Not Stopped Default: W1

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
P22.26 Event: Prepare Check Measurement Default: W2

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than
the maximum check fill level (P22.20 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.

Parameters
P22.27 DO: Check Measurement Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message that the check system is in the measuring
phase.
P22.28 Event: Expect Acceptance Default: W2

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded
(P22.03 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction
P22.29 DO:Expect Acceptance Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the information that the check system is waiting for
the operator's decision at the end.
The output is independent of the event class.
Also refer to: P22.28 Event: Expect Acceptance
P22.30 Absolute Range Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the sum of all previous corrections.
Correction will not be made automatically if the threshold would be exceeded by a check.
An event will be identified in each case.
See also:
P22.32 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
P22.34 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error

Parameters
P22.31 Relative Range Default: 3 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the currently pending correction.
Correction will not be made automatically if the error overshoots the threshold. An event will
be identified in each case.
See also:
P22.33 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error
P22.35 Event: Relative Span Correction Error
P22.32 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
This correction makes the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the threshold
P22.30 Absolute Range. There is no automatic correction.
The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. Monitoring and
messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P22.36
Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the analysis.
Tsum = (TK + N) / Qo × 100 %
Tsum = sum of all previous tare corrections as a %

TK = P10.08 Tare Correction in kg
Qo = nominal loading at the discharge point in kg
N = just-determined zero-point error in kg
Note:
The integral of the discharge screw speed, loss in weight of the control hopper and the
counter progress for the continuous scales are used to determine the zero-point error.

Parameters
P22.33 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error Default: W1

The relative zero-point error, i.e. the error determined during the most recent check, is
greater than the threshold P22.31 Relative Range.
Trel = N / Qo × 100 %
Trel = just-determined tare error in %

Note:
The integral of the discharge screw speed, loss in weight of the control hopper and the
counter progress for the continuous scales are used to determine the zero-point error.
P22.34 Event: Absolute Span Correction Default: W1

Error
The threshold in P22.30 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for
multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.06 Range Correction

Parameters
P22.35 Event: Relative Span Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P22.31 Relative
Range.
Brel = (1 - B )× 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
P22.36 Correction Evaluation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
The extent of the correction is determined by the factor P22.36 Correction Evaluation.
There is no correction with P22.36 = 0 and the complete defect ascertained is corrected
with P22.36 = 1.
P22.36 = 1 is normally set for the first control measurement to make a basic setting. Sub-
sequent corrections, in particular when checks are automatically started, are normally car-
ried out with P22.36 < 1. This makes it possible to filter the control results and eliminate
random measuring errors in the control measurement.
P22.37 Correction Speed Default: 0 s

The correction alters the continuous scales settings, thus causing a actual feed rate that
changes discontinuously if the feed rate setpoint remains constant.
P22.37 allows the entire correction to be split up over time into several stages of 0.1% of
the size of the nominal load in P10.04 Nominal Load Outlet (when correcting additive er-
rors) or 0.001% when correcting multiplicative errors.

Parameters
P22.38 AO: Check Measurement Result Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the analog output channel for the result of the control (loss in bin weight) / (ad-
vancement in continuous scales counter). Updating is made at the start of an acknowled-
gement phase. The output value is retained until the next acknowledgement phase. The
correction quantification in P22.36 Correction Evaluation is disregarded at output.
Signal scaling is linear between 4 ... 20 mA = 0.9 ... 1.1.

Examples:
4 mA = 0.9
12 mA = 1
20 mA = 1.1
P22.39 DO: Check Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P22.01 Type of
Check System = Filling System).
Procedure: the control gate will divert the material either through the normal conveyance
path or into the control bin. The correct position of the control gate can be monitored by the
digital input 'Echo Control Gate' (P22.40 Check Gate Feedback).
P22.40 Check Gate Feedback Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter only relates to the check by weight increase in the bin (P22.01 Type of
Check System = filling system).
Defines the input channel for the position return signal from the control gate. The return
signal is not monitored with the setting 'n/a'.
If there is no feedback from the control gate within the monitoring time (P22.41 Check Gate
Time), the 'control gate error' event is set and the KME is canceled.
Also refer to: P22.39 DO: Check Gate, P22.42 Event: Check Gate Error

Parameters
P22.41 Check Gate Time Default: 0 s

Tolerated time allowed for the control gate to move between command and position return
signal.
Also refer to:

P22.39 DO: Check Gate
P22.40 Check Gate Feedback
P22.42 Event: Check Gate Error
P22.42 Event: Check Gate Error Default: W1

The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P22.41 Check Gate Time

Parameters
P22.43 Limit Max. Bin Error Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 10000 %
The bin fill level is measured at the start and the end of the measuring phase. Both measur-
ing points are monitored for disturbances in the measurement.
If the malfunctions exceed the threshold value in P22.43, another attempt at measuring will
be started after a time defined by P22.22 Damping Time. However, if this attempt also re-
turns excessively high malfunctions, the check will be canceled, the results discarded and
an event identified (P22.44 Event: Bin Error). Disturbances are not monitored if the setting
is 0 %.
How to set:
1. set the threshold to 10,000 %
2. Monitor the service display 'KME Window' during the check procedure
and note the max. value.
3. key in approximately 3 times this value in parameter P22.43 Limit Max. Bin Error.
P22.44 Event: Bin Error Default: W1

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check.
The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has
been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P22.43 Limit Max. Bin Error
P22.45 DO: Correction Error Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for displaying an error condition of the control measurement.
The output is set if one of the events CH 04 - CH 07 occurs (measuring result lies outside
tolerance levels). The check is finished, although the correction has not been carried out.

Parameters
P22.46 Event: Correction MAX Default: W2

P22.47 Evaluation Factor Gain Default: 0.002

Min: 0 Max: 0.01
P22.48 Limit Gain Default: 5 %

Min: 1 % Max: 10 %
P22.49 Event: Limit Gain Default: W2

P22.50 Evaluation Factor Tare Default: 0.002

Min: 0 Max: 0.01
P22.51 Limit Tare Default: 5 %

Min: 1 % Max: 10 %
P22.52 Event: Limit Tare Default: W2


Parameters
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Moisture

For certain processes, other units than units of weight per time may be more relevant to the feeding
process. One example is bulk material moisture. The relevant parameter is not the weight of the moist ma-
terial but rather the weight of the dry material.
The measuring system can correct bulk solid properties such as these. This requires that the disturbance
variable, e.g. the moisture or ash content, be measured and the result sent to the system. The measuring
system then calculates the bulk solid components relevant to the process and feeds it instead of the total
weight.
P23.01 Moisture Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The actual flow rate can be corrected with the moisture block. The corrected value will al-
ways be used for the controller input and the batch counter if moisture correction is active.
The pulses for an external counter can be issued configured with P23.14 Pulse Counter
corrected, corrected or not corrected.
NO: No correction
YES: Weight signal is corrected
The parameters relevant to moisture correction are visible only when correction is active.
P23.02 Moisture Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With factory default value "n/a" , the correction is not active.
P23.03 AI: Moisture Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture con-
tent.
Also refer to:

P23.04 Nominal Moisture
P23.05 Moisture Offset
P23.06 Moisture Range

Parameters
P23.04 Nominal Moisture Default: 20 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight.
Also refer to:

P23.03 AI: Moisture Measurement
P23.05 Moisture Offset
P23.06 Moisture Range
P23.05 Moisture Offset Default: 4 mA

Current for a correction value of 0%
Reference value: P23.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P23.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P23.06 Moisture Range
P23.06 Moisture Range Default: 20 mA

Current for a correction value of 100%
Reference value: P23.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P23.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P23.05 Moisture Offset
P23.07 DO: Moisture active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the output channel for signal 'Correction active'.
Also refer to: P23.02 Moisture Select

Parameters
P23.08 Moisture MAX Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P23.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P23.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P23.09 DO: Moisture MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has ex-
ceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P23.08 Moisture MAX, P23.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P23.10 Event: Moisture MAX Default: W1

Event Group: MF Number: 05
The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been ex-
ceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P23.08 Moisture MAX, P23.09 DO: Moisture MAX
P23.11 AO: Flow Rate corrected Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P23.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P23.13 AO: Flow Rate Range

Parameters
P23.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for an output of 0 %.
P23.13 AO: Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for an output of 100 %.
P23.14 Pulse Counter corrected Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter.
NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity

YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction
factor, e.g. moisture.
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Load Helixinlet

The MULTIFLEX system can be equipped with a force measuring system at the transition between control
hopper and discharge screw. Generally, forces are measured at this point only in order to control the activity
of the agitator such that extraction from the hopper stays constant. It is usually only required to analyze sig-
nals during commissioning and thus to parameterize properly the agitator control.
The signal at the hopper extraction point supplies information on whether the discharge feeder inlet is being
filled uniformly. A drop off in the weight signal is an indication of arching in the hopper that would require the
activation of the agitator.
P24.01 LC: Loadcell Default: LC VCU2.LC1

Alternative: LC
n/a
Definition of the input channel for connecting a load cell at the interconnection point be-
tween the hopper and the discharge screw. In general the input should be connected to an
additional VCU with the VIO software.
See also: P24.02 LC Characteristic Value, P24.03 LC Rated Capacity

Parameters

Transmission factor for the load cell at the interconnection point between the hopper and
the discharge screw.
See also: P24.01 LC: Loadcell, P24.03 LC Rated Capacity

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the nominal loads of the load cells at the interconnection point between the hopper
and the discharge screw.
See also: P24.01 LC: Loadcell, P24.02 LC Characteristic Value

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Time constant for the filter for the signal of the load cells at the interconnection point be-
tween the hopper and the discharge screw.
P24.05 Event: Error LC Input Default: W1

The measuring signal of the load cells at the interconnection point between the hopper and
the discharge screw is impermissible.
Possible cause:
- broken cable or short circuit within the cable
- defective load cell
- force shunts or overloading of the load cells

Parameters

Min: 0.2 Max: 5
Correction of the transmission factor for the load cells at the interconnection point between
the hopper and the discharge screw. In general the absolute accuracy of the measurement
is not important. This parameter generally can therefore remain at the factors setting '1'.
An exact adjustment can be made using a calibration weight and the force measurement
display. This parameter has a multiplicative effect.
P24.07 Tare (Inlet) Default: 0 kg

Preloading of the load cells at the interconnection point between the hopper and the dis-
charge screw.
The preload value is set manually. The measured value for an empty hopper is read and
entered into the parameter P24.07.
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block

Block 25 - Pressure Compensation
Pressure compensation has the function of compensating the vertical forces resulting from pressures on the
bin in the weight signal. The pressure is measured, the resulting force acting on the surface area affected by
the applied pressure calculated and the bin weight value corrected additively.
P25.01 Compensation Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates pressure compensation.
If compensation is not activated, the associated parameters will not be displayed in Easy-
Serve.

Parameters
P25.02 Compensation Source Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
LC
Definition of the input channel for the pressure measurement signal.
Note: if the pressure forces are high in relation to the weight, the signal must be transmitted
by means of the very high resolution channel to a DMS weight recorder. A signal level con-
vertor may need to be integrated between the sensor and the DISOCONT Tersus input.
A different analog input with a lower resolution can be used for low pressure forces.
See also:
With the LC setting: P25.03 Pressure Characteristic Value, P25.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
With the AI setting: P25.18 Compensation analog Input Offset, P25.19 Compensation ana-
log Input Range
P25.03 Pressure Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V

Transmission parameter for the pressure sensor.
See also: P25.02 Compensation Source, P25.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
P25.04 Pressure Rated Cap. Default: 0.5 Bar

Min: 0.001 Bar Max: 2000 Bar
Nominal pressure for the pressure sensor.
See also: P25.02 Compensation Source, P25.03 Pressure Characteristic Value
P25.05 Filter Pressure Value DMS Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Relevant only if P25.02 Compensation Source = LC
Filter time constant in the signal path of the pressure acquisition.

Parameters
P25.06 Event: DMS-Input Default: A

Pressure signal is outside of the permissible range.
Possible cause:
- broken sensor or convertor cable
- short circuit at the sensor cable or at the convertor
- defective signal convertor
P25.07 Event: DMS-Input > MAX Default: A

The pressure input signal exceeds the permissible range.
Possible cause:
- pressure too high
- sensor error
- signal convertor error
P25.08 Event: DMS-Input < MIN Default: W1

The pressure input signal is beneath the permissible range.
Possible cause:
- sensor error
- incorrect connection
P25.09 Zero Default: 0 Bar

Min: -100 Bar Max: 1000 Bar
Pressure signal value at zero pressure.
This setting is entered manually by reading the pressure value for P25.09 = 0 and entering
it into the parameter.

Parameters
P25.10 Norming Default: 0 kg/Bar

Min: 0 kg/Bar Max: 220000000 kg/Bar
Conversion factor for converting pressure into a vertical force.
The factor takes the area affected by the pressure into account. This allows it to be roughly
calculated over the calculated surface area. Optimization through experimentation will be
required.
To optimize, the pressure is altered and the hopper weight monitored. If the hopper weight
displayed increases with increasing pressure, P25.10 must be increased. The setting has
been correctly made when the hopper weight displayed is independent of the pressure
(influence lower than 0.1% of P20.09 Nominal Bin Load).
P25.11 Pressure-MIN Default: 0 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
Lower threshold for the pressure signal.
Reference value: P25.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
See also: P25.12 Event: Pressure-MIN, P25.13 DO: Pressure-MIN
P25.12 Event: Pressure-MIN Default: W2

The pressure measured in the hopper has fallen below the lower threshold. This generally
does not represent a fault.
See also: P25.11 Pressure-MIN
P25.13 DO: Pressure-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the output channel for the signal that indicates that the pressure has fallen
below the lower threshold. The signal output is independent of the class of the associated
event.
See also: P25.11 Pressure-MIN, P25.12 Event: Pressure-MIN

Parameters
P25.14 Pressure-MAX Default: 105 %

Min: -100 % Max: 200 %
Upper threshold for the pressure signal.
See also: P25.15 Event: Pressure-MAX, P25.16 DO: Pressure-MAX
P25.15 Event: Pressure-MAX Default: W2

The pressure measured in the hopper has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- pressure too high
- pressure measurement error
See also: P25.14 Pressure-MAX, P25.16 DO: Pressure-MAX
P25.16 DO: Pressure-MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the output channel for the signal that indicates that the pressure has exceeded
the upper threshold. The signal output is independent of the class of the associated event.
See also: P25.14 Pressure-MAX, P25.15 Event: Pressure-MAX
P25.17 DI: Switch On Compensation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Definition of the input channel for switching on pressure compensation. Compensation is
always on if the setting is set to 'n/a'.

Parameters
P25.18 Compensation analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

Relevant only if P25.02 Compensation Source = AI.
Input current for a pressure of 0%.
P25.19 Compensation analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

Relevant only if P25.02 Compensation Source = AI.
Input current for a pressure of 100%.
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Helix-

Helix-Switch
The discharge screws can be run alternately. Details can be found in the appendices.
The parameters in this group control the switchover behavior between the screws and apply only to feeders
with two discharge screws.
P26.01 active Helix Default: Helix 1 and 2

Alternative: Helix 1 and 2
only Helix 1
only Helix 2
Adjustments for the mechanical layout.
Helix 1 and 2:
System with two discharge screws.
Helix 1 only:
System with one discharge screw; controlled via connections for screw 1.
Helix 2 only:
System with one discharge screw; controlled via connections for screw 2.

Parameters
P26.02 Threshold High Default: 50 %

Min: 0.01 % Max: 200 %
Threshold for the actuating variable above which both discharge screws will be activated.
The current mode of operation (alternate screws or both screws in continuous operation)
will be retained if operating within the range between the two threshold values High and
Low.
See also: P26.03 Threshold Low
Applies only to operation with two discharge screws (see P26.01 active Helix).
P26.03 Threshold Low Default: 30 %

Min: 0.01 % Max: 200 %
Threshold for the actuating variable below which the feeder will operate using alternate
discharge screws. The current mode of operation (alternate screws or both screws in conti-
nuous operation) will be retained if operating within the range between the two threshold
values High and Low.
See also: P26.02 Threshold High
P26.04 Switch-Time Default: 30 s

Min: 1 s Max: 36000 s
Duration for which each screw runs when operating in alternating mode with two discharge
screws. Once this time is up the feeder will switch to the other screw.
See also: P26.02 Threshold High, P26.03 Threshold Low

Parameters
P26.05 DO: Helix 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the signal output to switch on discharge screw 1.
See also: P26.01 active Helix
P26.06 DO: Helix 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the signal output to switch on discharge screw 2.
See also: P26.01 active Helix
P26.07 DI: Helix 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Definition of the input channel of the sensor signal for sensing the angle of rotation of screw
1.
See also:
P26.08 DI: Helix 2
P26.09 Angle: Helix 1 - Helix 2
P26.08 DI: Helix 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Definition of the input channel of the sensor signal for sensing the angle of rotation of screw
2.
See also:
P26.07 DI: Helix 1
P26.09 Angle: Helix 1 - Helix 2

Parameters
P26.09 Angle: Helix 1 - Helix 2 Default: 0 Grad

Min: -180 Grad Max: 180 Grad
Set the target angle between screws 1 and 2.
The angle between the screws should be selected so that the pulsation of both agitators
counterbalance each other as best as possible. An internal controller changes both speeds
in according to the variation in the difference between the angles of rotation in order to set
the target angle.
The controller works in two-screw operation only (P26.01 active Helix and limit values in
P26.02 Threshold High, P26.03 Threshold Low) and with two angle of rotation sensors.
See also:
P26.07 DI: Helix 1
P26.08 DI: Helix 2
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Helix-

Helix-Controller
The speeds of the discharge screws are regulated by speed controllers. The parameters in this group confi-
gure the controllers. Discharge screw 1 (SR1) is assigned to screw 1 and discharge screw 2 (SR2) is as-
signed to screw 2.
Details on the control can be found in the appendices.
P27.01 HC1: P-Component KP Default: 0.04 mA/%

Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
Proportional component of the speed controller for screw 1.
P27.02 HC1: I-Component TN Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the integral component of the speed controller for screw 1.
Within this reset time, if the control deviation is steady, the integral component effects the
actuating variable to the same degree as the proportional component. The reset time
should be similar to the time constant of the unit consisting of drive motor and drive control-
ler.

Parameters
P27.03 HC1: Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Lower threshold value for the internal actuating variable of screw controller 1. The value
should not be much lower than the value in P27.05 HC1: Offset.
P27.04 HC1: Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

Upper threshold value for the internal actuating variable of screw controller 1.
P27.05 HC1: Offset Default: 0 mA

Minimum value for the actuating variable to be output of screw controller 1.
P27.06 HC1:Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
Definition of the actuating variable when the screw if switched off.
'0': actuating variable 0 mA is output if OFF.

'Lower Limit': an actuating variable as set by P27.05 HC1: Offset is output if OFF.
P27.08 HC1: Controller Magnitude Default: AO VCU1.AO1

Alternative: AO
n/a
Definition of the actuating variable output channel for discharge screw 1.
See also: P27.04 HC1: Upper Limit, P27.05 HC1: Offset
P27.09 HC2: P-Component KP Default: 0.04 mA/%

Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
Proportional component of the speed controller for screw 2.

Parameters
P27.10 HC2: I-Component TN Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the integral component of the speed controller for screw 2.
Within this reset time, if the control deviation is steady, the integral component effects the
actuating variable to the same degree as the proportional component. The reset time
should be similar to the time constant of the unit consisting of drive motor and drive control-
ler.
P27.11 HC2: Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Lower threshold value for the internal actuating variable of screw controller 2. The value
should not be much lower than the value in P27.13 HC2: Offset.
P27.12 HC2: Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

Upper threshold value for the internal actuating variable of screw controller 2.
P27.13 HC2: Offset Default: 0 mA

Minimum value for the actuating variable to be output of screw controller 2.
P27.14 HC2:Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
Definition of the actuating variable when the screw if switched off.
'0': actuating variable 0 mA is output if OFF.

'Lower Limit': an actuating variable as set by P27.05 HC1: Offset is output if OFF.

Parameters
P27.16 HC2: Controller Mag. Default: AO VCU1.AO2

Alternative: AO
n/a
Definition of the actuating variable output channel for discharge screw 2.
See also: P27.12 HC2: Upper Limit, P27.13 HC2: Offset
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Agitator Control

The feeder mechanics can be equipped with one or two agitators in the hopper. If there are two agitators
they work in opposite directions.
Time conditions, the feed rate setpoint and, if applicable, measurement of screw loading at the extraction
point of the hopper all govern the activation of the screws.
The agitator arms always oscillate between two end positions.
P28.01 DO: Agitator 1 Left Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the controller output to switch on agitator 1, direction left.
P28.02 DO: Agitator 1 Right Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the controller output to switch on agitator 1, direction right.
P28.03 DI: Limit Switch 1 Left Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Definition of the input signal of the left limit switch for agitator 1.
P28.04 DI: Limit Switch 1 Right Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Definition of the input signal of the right limit switch for agitator 1.

Parameters
P28.05 DO: Agitator 2 Left Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P28.06 DO: Agitator 2 Right Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P28.07 DI: Limit Switch 2 Left Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P28.08 DI: Limit Switch 2 Right Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P28.09 Min. Waiting Period Default: 5 s

Idling time between the reaching of an end position and the start of movement in the other
direction in no-filling operation, not to be shorter than the minimum duration P28.13 Delay
reversing.
P28.10 Setpoint dependent Period Default: 0 s

Idling time, dependent on the feed rate setpoint, additional to P28.09 Min. Waiting Period
between the reaching of an end position and the start of movement in the other direction.
Feed rate = P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate: the additional idling time is 0 s.
Feed rate = 0: the additional idling time is the value set in P28.10.
With increasing setpoint the time decreases in a linear curve between the two limits.

Parameters
P28.11 Weight Threshold Default: 100 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Irrespective of the time conditions set in P28.09 Min. Waiting Period and P28.10 Setpoint
dependent Period, the agitator is started if the lower weight threshold for measurement at
the interconnection point between the hopper and the discharge screw is underrun.
Reference value: weight after agitator activity.
P28.12 Active by Filling Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Definition of the agitator activity during hopper filling.
NO: normal agitator control is maintained (see P28.10 Setpoint dependent Period, P28.10
Setpoint dependent Period, P28.11 Weight Threshold).
YES: once an end limit has been reached and the idle time in P28.13 Delay reversing has
elapsed, the agitator begins to move in the opposite direction.
P28.13 Delay reversing Default: 2 s

Min: 0 s Max: 20 s
Minimum agitator idle time after operation in a particular direction. The use of certain types
of drive controller may make an idle time compulsory if they do not allow for quick direction
change.
P28.14 DI: Overload 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P28.15 DI: Overload 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters
P28.16 Event: Agitator Overload Default: W1

Event Group: WM Number: 13
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - Safety Functions

The parameters in this group define special monitoring events when feeding dangerous bulk materials. The-
se functions must be activated if feeding pulverized coal.
P29.01 Safety activation: Option code Default: n/a
Activation and de-activation of the extended safety functions via code.
The safety functions reduce the range of allowed values of some parameters. They are
activated in case of the risk of serious danger resulting from a wrong parameter setting.
Typical use: Dosing of fuel. Details for the limitations are found in the appendix chapter
"Safety Function for Feeding Hazardous Materials".
The safety functions can only be activated and de-activated via codes specific for the de-
vice. These codes can only be generated by Schenck Process.
When the correct activation code is entered, the parameter shows "SAFETY SET:Enabled",
when disabled with the correct code it shows "SAFETY SET:Disabled". The setting remains
on loading of defaults and on loading of the application software. Units with activated safety
functions are of type VCU20100-S with a specific material number.
P29.02 Source Emergency Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
If the emergency setpoint is activated, setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint
(P29.03 Emergency Setpoint) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.

Parameters
P29.03 Emergency Setpoint Default: 0 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
If the emergency setpoint is activated (input P29.02 Source Emergency Setpoint), setpoints
greater than the emergency setpoint (P29.03) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P29.04 Setpoint Step + Default: 300 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 300 % Io
Max increase of the setpoint in one step if entered by keyboard.
P29.05 Setpoint Step - Default: 300 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 300 % Io
Max reduction of the setpoint in one step if entered by keyboard.
P29.06 Setpoint Factor Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 100
Increase of the setpoint step by the factor entered with the scales switched off.
P29.07 If OFF: Reset Setpoint Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines how the setpoint behaves when the scales are switched off.
YES: the keyboard setpoint is set to zero when the scales are switched off.
P29.08 Feeder Check FC Default: NO

Alternative: NO
n
Monitors the feed rate setpoints behavior and the output capacity in volumetric operation.
NO: no monitoring
n: measured speed is monitored
See also: P29.09 FC: Tolerance at 100% ... P29.15 DO: FC-MIN Limit

Parameters
P29.09 FC: Tolerance at 100% Default: 40 %

Min: 0 % Max: 300 %
A permissible deviation in the speed or actuating variable at a rotational speed setpoint of
100 %.
The reference is the nominal speed (P03.02 Nominal Speed)).
Linear equations determine the tolerance for the deviation between the 3 setpoint points.
Also refer to:

P29.08 Feeder Check FC
P29.10 FC: Tolerance at 50%
P29.11 FC: Tolerance at 0%

Min: 0 % Max: 300 %
Permissible deviation of the speed or the actuating variable with a speed setpoint of 50%.
The nominal speed is the reference value (P03.02 Nominal Speed).
See also: P29.08 Feeder Check FC, P29.09 FC: Tolerance at 100%

Min: 0 % Max: 300 %
Permissible deviation of the speed or the actuating variable with a speed setpoint of 0%.
The nominal speed is the reference value (P03.02 Nominal Speed).
See also: P29.08 Feeder Check FC, P29.09 FC: Tolerance at 100%
P29.12 Event: FC-MIN Limit Default: W1

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is smaller than the
threshold.
Possible reasons:
- bulk material is shooting through the discharge unit

Parameters
P29.13 Event: FC-MAX Limit Default: A

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is larger than the
threshold.
Possible reasons:
P29.14 DO: FC-MAX Limit Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output used if the ratio between actuating variable and feed rate setpoint is larger than the
threshold value. The output is independent of the class of the associated event.
Also refer to: P29.13 Event: FC-MAX Limit
P29.15 DO: FC-MIN Limit Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output used if the ratio between actuating variable and feed rate setpoint is smaller than
the threshold value. The output is independent of the class of the associated event.
See also: P29.12 Event: FC-MIN Limit

Parameters
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - Fixed mode configuration

Configuration of the data in fieldbus communication 'FIXED' mode.
Relevant only if P16.09 Configuration = FIXED_8_16
Remark: With the factory settings, DISOCONT Tersus behaves like the former DISOCONT.
P30.01 ID Preset Value 1 Default: 320
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the Fieldbus telegram. It can-
not be changed in this parameter.
The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the 'data com-
munication' manual:
Corresponds to P30.01 ID Preset Value 1

Parameters
P30.09 ID Read Value 1 Default: 752
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The
number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual:
As P30.09 ID Read Value 1

Parameters

Parameters
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - FCB analog outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical analog outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P31.01 FCB_AO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P31.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 Default: 4 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 0.

Parameters
P31.03 Range FCB_AO 1 Default: 20 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 100%
Reference value: P31.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
See also: P31.01 FCB_AO 01
P31.04 Reference FCB_AO 1 Default: 1000

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output.
Also refer to: P31.01 FCB_AO 01, P31.03 Range FCB_AO 1

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01
P31.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P31.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P31.04 Reference FCB_AO 1

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Parameters

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P31.01 FCB_AO 01
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - FCB digital outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical binary outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P32.01 FCB_DO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Data Logging

The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
P33.01 Hourly Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 59 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a full
hour.
P33.02 Daily Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 1439 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a day.
P33.03 Logger cycle time Default: 1 min

Min: 1 min Max: 1439 min
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P33.04 ... P33.13.
P33.04 Data Log Value 1 Default: 752
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in
the 'data communication' manual.
Also refer to:

P33.03 Logger cycle time
These manuals:

Parameters
Similar to P33.04 Data Log Value 1

Parameters
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - Configuration HMI Values

The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the oper-
ating panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus.
On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation
map in the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data com-
munication:
P34.01 HMI Value 01 Default: 1894
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.

Parameters
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Bin Weigher Adaption
P35.01 Helix Load (Calibration) Default: 70 kg

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 1000000 kg

Parameters
P35.02 Bin Load (Calibration) Default: 100 % LC

Min: 0 % LC Max: 1000 % LC
P35.03 Bin Adaption Factor Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 1
P35.04 Limit MIN Default: 0.5

Min: 0.1 Max: 1
P35.05 Limit MAX Default: 2

Min: 1 Max: 10

Event Messages
8 Event Messages
DANGER
Events register abnormal states, e.g. malfunctions or exceeded thre-
shold values.
A running feeder can be a hazard to people or to property.
The cause of event messages must be corrected before events are ac-
knowledged!
Event messages are grouped together.
Group Identifier Event Domain
SY Internally monitoring the control system
SC Irregularities in operator control or peripheral control
WE Fault in the external power electronics
WM Fault in the mechanical system
MF Fault in the bulk material flow
IL Messages from interlocking with system control
CO Internal controller malfunction message
CA Adjustment fault
HI Threshold value exceeded upwards
LO Threshold value exceeded downwards

Tab. 34 : Event groups
Note:
In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.

Event Messages
8.1 Events Details
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration
CA01 Event: Error LC Input (P07.04)

The load cell cable for the weight measurement point is improperly connected, not
connected or has been broken. The load cell may be faulty.
Steps to be taken:
- check the load cell
- if the cabling and the load cell are intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the
VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be
switched on even after the error has been rectified.
CA02 Event: Tachometer Input (P07.03)

The signals at one of the feeder drive's impulse tachometer inputs are outside of the
specified range.
Possible reasons:
- there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wir-
ing).
- the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
See also:

Event Messages
CA03 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) (P20.07)

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted.
The load cell may be faulty.
Steps to take :
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be
switched on even after the error has been rectified.
CA07 Event: DMS-Input (P25.06)

Pressure signal is outside of the permissible range.
Possible cause:
- broken sensor or convertor cable
- short circuit at the sensor cable or at the convertor
- defective signal convertor
CA10 Event: Error LC Input (P24.05)

The measuring signal of the load cells at the interconnection point between the hop-
per and the discharge screw is impermissible.
Possible cause:
- broken cable or short circuit within the cable
- defective load cell
- force shunts or overloading of the load cells
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement
CH01 Event: Minimum Check Quantity (P22.17)

During the check the quantity of bulk material discharged over a set number of screw
revolutions was lower than the lower threshold value (P22.16 Minimum Check Quan-
tity).
Possible cause:
- weight of the bulk material fed was beneath the specified range
- the number of revolutions was set too low for a check.

Event Messages
CH02 Event: Minimum Fill Weight (P22.19)

The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P22.18 Minimum Fill Weight dur-
ing a check. The controlling measurement is finished prematurely.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density higher than specified
- unfavorable settings in P22.14 Check Quantity, P22.13 Check Motor Rotations,
P22.18 Minimum Fill Weight or P22.15 Storage Quantity
CH03 Event: Maximum Fill Weight (P22.21)

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is
finished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P22.15 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control
fill level (P22.20 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts.
In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
CH04 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error (P22.32)

This correction makes the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the threshold
P22.30 Absolute Range. There is no automatic correction.
The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. Monitor-
ing and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting
factor P22.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the analysis.
Tsum = (TK + N) / Qo × 100 %
Tsum = sum of all previous tare corrections as a %

TK = P10.08 Tare Correction in kg
Note:
The integral of the discharge screw speed, loss in weight of the control hopper and
the counter progress for the continuous scales are used to determine the zero-point
error.

Event Messages
CH05 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error (P22.33)

The relative zero-point error, i.e. the error determined during the most recent check,
is
greater than the threshold P22.31 Relative Range.
Trel = N / Qo × 100 %
Trel = just-determined tare error in %

Note:
The integral of the discharge screw speed, loss in weight of the control hopper and
the counter progress for the continuous scales are used to determine the zero-point
error.
CH06 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error (P22.34)

The threshold in P22.30 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections
for multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.06 Range Correction
CH07 Event: Relative Span Correction Error (P22.35)

The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P22.31 Rela-
tive Range.
Brel = (1 - B )× 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)

Event Messages
CH08 Event: Feeder Not Stopped (P22.25)

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
CH09 Event: No Check Release (P22.07)

This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not au-
thorized one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the
missing authorization.
CH10 Event: Prepare Check Measurement (P22.26)

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still great-
er than the maximum check fill level (P22.20 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
CH11 Event: Expect Acceptance (P22.28)

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is
exceeded (P22.03 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction

Event Messages
CH12 Event: Check Gate Error (P22.42)

This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P22.01
Type of Check System = Filling System).
The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P22.41 Check Gate Time
CH13 Event: Bin Error (P22.44)

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the
check. The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the
event class has been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P22.43 Limit Max. Bin Error
CH16 Event: Limit Tare (P22.52)

Event Messages
8.1.3 Event Group:

Group: Controller
CO04 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor (P20.29)

The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not
shutting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P20.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false

adjustment of the calculation of the flow rate.
CO11 Event: Correction MAX (P22.46)
CO12 Event: Limit Gain (P22.49)
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System
WE01 Event: Power Failure (P07.08)

This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically regardless of the event class. The event
must first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales
will restart.
WE02 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 (P12.13)

Possible cause:

Event Messages

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Event Messages

Possible cause:
WE08 Event: Analog Input < Offset (P07.15)

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input
signal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock
IL01 Event: Run Disabled (P04.06)

No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not
switched on.
IL02 Event: Mechanics (P19.10)

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic
diagram.
IL03 Event: Electricity (P19.12)

diagram.
IL04 Event: Mechatronics (P19.15)

diagram.

Event Messages
IL05 Event: Not Ready (P19.17)

diagram.
IL06 Event: Not Ready for Start (P19.19)

diagram.
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow
MF05 Event: Moisture MAX (P23.10)

The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has
been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P23.08 Moisture MAX, P23.09 DO: Moisture MAX
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX
HI01 Event: LC Input > MAX (P07.06)

The load cell load at the discharge point is greater than 110% of the sum of the load
cell nominal loads.

125% for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175% for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Event Messages
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX (P09.04)

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equip-
ment
- feed rate setpoint too large
HI03 Event: Load MAX (P09.08)

Loading at the discharge point has exceeded the upper threshold value.
Possible reasons:
- bulk material density greater than specified
HI05 Event: Deviation (P07.13)

Maximum control deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from
the setpoint over too long a period of time.
Possible reasons:
- material has been incorrectly handled
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
The density of the bulk material is outside of the specified range.
- the controller has at times been at its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor Check the output
regulator settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical
value that minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable
operation.
- false compensation of tensile forces in the discharge area

Event Messages
HI07 Event: Speed-Max (P09.12)

Speed of the feeder drive exceeds the limit set in Speed-Max Value.
Possible reasons:
- the discharge screw has been filled poorly
- extremely low bulk material weight
HI10 Event: LC Input > MAX (P20.08)

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI11 Event: Bin Level MAX (P20.19)

The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
HI13 Event: FC-MAX Limit (P29.13)

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is larger than
the threshold.
Possible reasons:

Event Messages
HI14 Event: DMS-Input > MAX (P25.07)

The pressure input signal exceeds the permissible range.
Possible cause:
- pressure too high
- sensor error
HI16 Event: Pressure-MAX (P25.15)

The pressure measured in the hopper has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- pressure too high
- pressure measurement error
See also: P25.14 Pressure-MAX, P25.16 DO: Pressure-MAX
8.1.8 Event Group: Mechanic
WM13 Event: Agitator Overload (P28.16)
8.1.9 Event Group:

Group: MIN
LO01 Event: LC Input < MIN (P07.05)

The load cell load at the discharge point is less than 3% of the sum of the load cell
rated loads.
Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Event Messages
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN (P09.02)

The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate
MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equip-
ment
- feed rate setpoint too low
LO03 Event: Load MIN (P09.06)

Loading at the discharge point has underrun the lower threshold value.
Possible reasons:
- bulk material density lower than specified
LO07 Event: Speed-Min (P09.10)

The motor speed of the feed helix is below Speed-Min Value.
Possible reasons:
- Extreme high material density
- Material flushing through the feed helix
- Feedrate setpoint very small
LO10 Event: DMS-Input < MIN (P25.08)

The pressure input signal is beneath the permissible range.
Possible cause:
- sensor error
- incorrect connection

Event Messages
LO11 Event: Bin Level MIN (P20.16)

The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
LO13 Event: FC-MIN Limit (P29.12)

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is smaller
than the threshold.
Possible reasons:
- bulk material is shooting through the discharge unit
LO16 Event: Pressure-MIN (P25.12)

The pressure measured in the hopper has fallen below the lower threshold. This
generally does not represent a fault.
See also: P25.11 Pressure-MIN
8.1.10 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring
SC01 Event: Setpoint Limited (P07.07)

Cause of the event:
Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in
volumetric operation.
SC02 Event: Stand-By (P07.01)

Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is
smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder
drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.

Event Messages
SC03 Event: Maint.Feeder Run (P14.04)

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P14.03
Maintenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC04 Event: Maint. Electric (P14.02)

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time
P14.01 Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC05 Event: External Event 1 (P12.01)

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive




Event Messages
8.1.11 Event Group: System Message

Message
SY01 Event: Memory (P07.14)

The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred
during that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.
SY02 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 (P01.06)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY03 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 (P01.10)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY04 Event: Communication HMI 1 (P02.06)

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.

Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.

Event Messages

Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
SY07 Event: Communication VHM serial (P02.11)

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM
operating panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485
Address)
SY08 Event: Cyclic Communication (P16.03)

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P16.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10 Event: Acyclic Communication (P16.04)

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
SY15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 (P01.13)

This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.

Event Messages
SY16 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 (P01.15)

This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.

Appendix
9 Appendix
Details of special functions are described in this chapter.
9.1 Details on Feed Rate Control
Fig. 7: Feed rate calculation and control

Appendix
Raw Load cell output raw measured value in mV per V of load cell input
Load Load of the discharge screw in kg
n (%) Actual speed of helix weighfeeder drive in 1/min
n1 Actual speed of helix weighfeeder drive 1 in 1/min
n2 Actual speed of helix weighfeeder drive 2 in 1/min
Q (kg) Loading of the helix weighfeeder in kg for use in feed rate control and recording
nw (%) Speed setpoint of the helix weighfeeder drive related to the nominal speed (P03.02)
nw1 (%) Speed setpoint of helix weighfeeder drive 1 related to the nominal speed (P03.02)
P (kg/h) Feed rate setpoint in kg/h
I (kg/h) Actual feed rate in kg/h
CTRL mode Controller operation mode switch
SW Switch for intermittent two-screw operation
PI1 Screw drive 1 speed controller (Details on the speed controller [➙ 224])
PI2 Screw drive 2 speed controller (Details on the speed controller [➙ 224])
Filter Filter
Tab. 35 : Signals and function blocks
Monitoring Control Deviation

The control deviation is displayed and monitored in gravimetric operation only.
The display, but not the monitoring system input, is filtered by parameter P08.05.
Event message P07.09 will be triggered if the value of the error signal Xd exceeds the limit value S1 for a
duration defined in parameter "Event: Deviation". Monitoring will restart if the error signal falls below the
threshold during this time.
At the same time, the control deviation value is filtered (filter time in parameter P07.09) and the filter output
is monitored. Event 'Event: Deviation' will be identified if the filter output exceeds the threshold value S2.
Threshold values S1 and S2 can be adapted to the current feed rate setpoint by means of the following for-
mulas:
S1 = P07.10 * [P07.11 + (1 - P07.11) * feed rate setpoint / P03.01]
S2 = P07.12 * [P07.11 + (1 - P07.11) * feed rate setpoint / P03.01]
The following diagram illustrates the relationship using with examples for threshold value S1.

Appendix
P Feed rate setpoint S Limit value S1 or S2
LIM Limit Value in P07.10 or. P07.12 F Influence Factor P07.11
The helix weighfeeder monitors the deviation of the current feed rate from its setpoint.
Monitoring control deviation

The upper trigger threshold of the control deviation monitoring can be changed by P07.11 setpoint-
dependent in order to reduce it for small setpoints and thus to identify critical system states at an early
stage. The effect of P07.11 is shown in the picture.
Fig. 8: Threshold of the actuating variable monitoring
The threshold S is calculated as follows:

S = P07.10 × (1 - P07.11) × feed rate setpoint / P03.01

Appendix
9.2 Details on the speed controller

The system contains two identical controllers for the speeds of both screws.
Fig. 9: Details on the speed controller
Symbol Controller 1 Controller 1 Comment
AO P27.08 P27.16 Assignment of logical signals to the physical interface
DI P05.04 P05.05
Max P27.04 P27.12 Actuating variable upper limit
Min P27.03 P27.11 Actuating variable lower limit
Offset P27.05 P27.13 Actuating variable offset
Kp P27.01 P27.09 Controller proportional component
Tn P27.02 P27.09 Controller reset time
i/r P05.01 Speed sensor constants in pulses per motor revolution
n0 P03.02 Maximum permissible speed of the drive motor (usually 3000

r.p.m.)
Tab. 36 : Parameters
Symbol Signal / Device
Y (mA) Actuating variable at the external controller in mA
F (Hz) Tachometer frequency in Hz
nx Actual motor speed in 1/min
nwx (%) Motor speed setpoint as a % of maximum speed (P03.02)

Appendix
Symbol Signal / Device
M Motor
T Pulse tachometer
VFD Output controller
FC Monitoring Equipment [➙ 237]

Tab. 37 : Signals
The PI controllers operate according to the following formula
Fig. 10: PI controller formula
Controller Parameters
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the
following diagram.
Fig. 11: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t = 0
The abbreviations are as follows:
Controller Parameters Meaning
KP P component of the feed rate controller as a % / % of the nominal feed rate

or the dimension-free P component of the speed controller
TN Reset time in seconds

Tab. 38 : Controller Parameters
Parameter value Special case
KP = 0 I-controller: KI = 1/TN in % / (mA/s)
TN = 0 P-controller: I-component will be deleted
KP=TN=0 Controller output = controller increase

Tab. 39 : Special cases of controller parameter setting

Appendix
9.3 Screw Switchover
Fig. 12: Screw switchover details
nw (%) Speed setpoint of the helix weighfeeder drive related to the nominal speed (P03.02)
Phi1 Screw 1 angle pulse sensor
Phi2 Screw 2 angle pulse sensor
ON Feeder switch-on command
ON1 Screw 1 drive switch-on command
ON2 Screw 2 drive switch-on command
Hyst Switchover hysteresis for alternating operation with two screws
Pulse Pulse generator for the switchover for alternating operation with two screws
dPhi Determining the difference in angle of the two screws

Tab. 40 : Signals and function blocks

Appendix
Settings for Alternate Operation with two Screws

Alternate operation with two screws is activated when the speed setpoint is very low. Under these operating
circumstances the drive motors of the screws rotate very slowly. This puts the drives at risk of overheating.
Furthermore, the screw discharge pulses at a low frequency.
On the other hand, if only one screw is used then arching may occur in the hopper. Therefore the screws
are run alternately.
The switchover thresholds from single to double screw operation (hyst) should be set so that switchover
does not occur too frequently. In general the lower switchover threshold (P26.03) is 5 % and the upper thre-
shold (P26.02) 10 % of the nominal speed.
The run time of a screw in two-screw mode ought to be approx. 30 s (P26.04). This ensures that arching in
the bin does not occur.
Screw Synchronization
Conveyance with screws results in a pulsed material discharge, whereby the discharge depends on the
angle of tilt of the screw. In two-screw operation (P26.01) the angles of tilt of both screws with constant feed
rate can be regulated such that the discharge behavior remains as uniform as possible. The setpoint for the
angular offset (P26.09) is set empirically so that the flow is as uniform as possible.

Appendix
9.4 Calculation of the Device Constants
Fig. 13: Helix weighfeeder device constants
f Pitch of the conveyor screw (advancement per revolution) [m]
T Rotation point
LC Force transducer (load cell) discharge side
a Width of the bulk material intake into the discharge screw symmetrical to the rotation point [m]
b Distance 'rotation point – end of screw' [m]
c Distance 'rotation point – force transducer' [m]
d Gearing transmission ratio between motor and discharge screw
Norm Device constants (P10.05 , 'Norming Factor Feedrate')

Tab. 41 : Formula symbols
The calculation formula for the device constants is to be used in approximation. The value of the parameter
can also be calculated during feeding with low feed rates using an adjustment program [➙ 46]. The value
can generally be taken from the data sheet.

Appendix
9.5 Setpoint and switch-

switch-on sources
Setpoint can be set and feed on and off commands can come from different sources.
Fig. 14: Setpoint and switch-on sources
The sources are preselected with parameters in the 'Control Sources' group.
You can use the OP Mode function to switch back and forth between the pre-selected sources and the key-
board (Keyboard Mode ON/OFF [➙ 30]).
Parameters Function Source
P04.01 Feeder Start OP = keyboard

FB = fieldbus
DI = contact
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint OP = keyboard

FB = fieldbus
AI = analog input (A/D)
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint n/a = not assigned

Setpoint with a percentage quantifier OP = keyboard
AI = analog input
The effective setpoint is displayed on the operating panel. The setpoint input field is available only if the
parameters allow input via the operating panel.
A new window for entering the relative component will open when the setpoint field is touched if the relative
setpoint qualifier was pre-selected with the operating panel.

Appendix
Setpoint Synchronization:
The external setpoint will be taken if the source of the setpoint is switched from an external source to the
keyboard (OP). The external source has its effect in the opposite direction.
On/Off Synchronization:
The on/off switch status is retained when switching from an external source to the keyboard (OP). The ex-
ternal source has its effect in the opposite direction.
Mains Power OFF:
The keyboard setpoints are stored.
Flow Chart of the Start and Stop Sequence
Fig. 15: The start and stop sequence
Time Condition
1 Feeding does not begin with the on command since the release signal has not been given.
2 To start, the scales requires the rising slope of a start command.
3 Feeding is started with the rising slope.
4 feed rate control will operate in volumetric operation (also refer to: Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchron-
ous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation) during the start up time defined by T1 = P06.01.

Appendix
Time Condition
5 Changing over in normal gravimetrically controlled feeding operation (assuming gravimetric mode
was previously selected). Control stays in volumetric mode (assuming it was previously selected by
the operator).
6 Feeding will be switched off if there is no all-clear signal (or if the switch on command was removed).
7 Feed rate recording continues over the time set by T2 = P06.02 to capture trickling bulk solids. After-
wards, the feed rate is no longer calculated; the counter stays at the level already achieved.
Tab. 42 : The states and points in time in the flow chart
Parameters Function
P06.01 Duration of the volumetric T1 start up period
P06.02 Continuation of totalizing after turning off T2 feeding (afterflow totalizer)
P04.01 Source of the on signal
P04.05 Source of the all-clear signal
P13.02 Scales signal output switched on

Tab. 43 : Relevant parameters
In Case of Alarm:
The feeder drive is switched off immediately if an alarm is triggered. The feed rate will continue to be rec-
orded even past the time set in P06.02 Afterflow Measurement Time.
Measurement and Displays:
The platform load will always be calculated and displayed. The totalized amount of material will only be cal-
culated with the feeder switched on and during the Afterflow Measurement Time (P06.02).
9.6 Agitator Control

The agitator has been designed as a pendulum-type agitator. Once it starts it moves in one direction until
the limit switch is triggered.
If the agitator type used is a double-agitator, both agitator arms start to move at the same time in opposite
directions. Both agitators are equipped with limit switches to ensure that they each reach their end position.
The agitator will start when one of the following conditions is satisfied:
▪ Bin filling is active (P20.14) and P28.12 = YES: the agitator will start once the time set by P28.13 has
elapsed after the previous end position was reached.
▪ The difference in weight at the screw inlet (defined by P24.01) since the previous end position was
reached exceeds the limit value in P28.11; nevertheless, the agitator will start only after the longer of the
two times given by P28.13 and P28.09 has elapsed.
▪ The agitator start is initiated as shown in the following diagram if the idle time is setpoint dependent
(P28.10):

Appendix
Fig. 16: Setpoint-dependent agitator idle time
T Idle time until next start after reaching end position
Set Feed rate setpoint
9.7 Bin Weigher: Scales and Filling Limits

Limits
Fig. 17: Control hopper scales and thresholds
The normal scales applies in normal operation. The fill level is regulated by the metering hopper. In intermit-
tent operation the metering hopper is activated when the fill level F-Min is underrun and is deactivated as
soon as the F-Max level is exceeded. If the metering hopper is continuously active (P21.01 = YES), the fill
level is regulated to the fill level setpoint F-Set by means of the changes in the metering hopper flow rate.
The check measurement takes over the fill regulation when a check is started. Wherever necessary, it is
filled until there are sufficient bulk solids in the bin (fill level > C-Check + C-Min). The check starts when the
fill level falls below F-Max and is stopped when the fill level falls below C-Min.

Appendix
In all situations the fill level sensor will identify overfilling if bulk materials with low density are used and sill
stop the filling process.
9.8 'Continuous' Control Measurement
Fig. 18: Measuring principle 'Continuous' KME
CH-L Measured value 'static' measurement P22.02 Check System Influence
DIFF Differentiator P03.01
INT Integrator P03.02
LP-F Low-pass filter; parameter, threshold frequency P22.47 Evaluation Factor Gain
LIM 30 s Limited to 30 s P22.48 Limit Gain
LIM 10 Limited to 10 s P22.50 Evaluation Factor Tare
LIM Threshold; parameter: upper and lower thresholds P22.51 Limit Tare
MAX-
MIN
Adaptation of the threshold dependent on the dis- !CO11 Event Event: Correction MAX
Adap
turbance level
1/x Reciprocal value !CO12 Event Event: Limit Gain
Standard Standardizing with help of the nominal speed ErrRoh Service value BIN: Error Roh
F Quantity of bulk material determined by weight loss BinErr Service value BIN: Error

Appendix
Quantity of bulk material determined by integration Init1 Initialization on initial adjustment (taring)
Z
of the totalized amount of material
CorGain Service value Correction Gain !CH16 Event Event: Limit Tare
CorTare Service value Correction Tare
Feed rate setpoint I Actual feed rate as measured by the weigh-

P
feeder
n Actual speed
Setup Notes
Periods in which no refilling takes place are required for checks. It is recommended that the DISOCONT
Tersus refill control be used. This will inform the system when no check can be performed due to the hopper
being filled.
A measuring error may occur and the weighfeeder may become unaligned if the DISOCONT Tersus is not
used to control the hopper filling, in particular if using a very low refill flow rate.
The corrective response represents a feedback control system. The closed-loop gain is set using the factors
in P22.47 and P22.50. No correction in that respective branch will be performed if a factor towards zero is
selected. It is recommended that both factors selected are ≠ zero as this will ensure that both tare and mea-
suring range are adjusted whenever there is an alternating feed rate setpoint during operation. Tare errors
and range errors cannot separately be measured and corrected if the system is operated with an unvarying
feed rate. The user decides upon the factors the components of which are assigned to the respective distur-
bance signals.
Instabilities may result if the factors chosen are too high. Corrections will be performed very slowly if the
factors chosen are too low. It is recommended that the course over several hours of the two corresponding
service values be displayed graphically in order to evaluate the control behavior.

Appendix
9.9 Details on Control Measurements and Correction 'Single' Type
Fig. 19: Control measurements and correction process diagram

Appendix
9.10 Continuous Hopper Fill Level Regulation
Fig. 20: Helix Weighfeeder hopper fill level controller
Setup Instructions
P21.12 can be determined in a stationary state once the transient oscillations have subsided. In this state,
the value is calculated as follows:
P21.12 = (yB - P21.14 ) × P03.01 / feed rate setpoint
We recommend calling up the 'Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation' adjustment program for the control
parameter after entering input the P21.07 and P21.12 parameters.

Appendix
9.11 Safety Functionality of Hazardous Material

Material Feeders (Combus
(Combustibles)
If the weighfeeder is used to convey combustibles or other hazardous materials, access via the VHM oper-
ating console to parameters and adjustment functions should be protected by a changeable password
(P02.12, P02.13) to increase safety.
Parameter P29.01 'Hazardous Material Feeder' must be activated and write access must be disallowed
(Parameters). This disables some of the settings that could be made in normal operation.
Simulation mode cannot be selected.
The range of adjustments that can be made to parameters is restricted:
▪ The setpoint is always set to zero when the scales are OFF (P29.07 = YES).
▪ The conveying element check FC (safety circuit [➙ 237]) always monitors the speed (P29.08 = n) as a
function of the setpoint. The parameter used to increase the setpoint per entry (P29.04) is limited to
maximum 30 % and the parameter used to decrease the setpoint (P29.05) is limited to maximum 50 %.
▪ The parameter Setpoint FactorP29.06 for increasing the possible setpoint alterations when the scales
are switched off is limited to a maximum of 10.
▪ Event class ALARM only is permitted for the following event messages. Any other entries will be reset to
ALARM.
– Interrupted SY communications .. at the local bus between VCU 1 and the connected VCU expan-
sion units (parameter block 'Hardware Modules')
– CA01, LC input (P07.04)
– CA02, tacho input (P07.03)
– LO01, LC input < MIN (P07.05)
– HI01, LC input > MAX (P07.06)
– HI05, control deviation error (P07.13)
– HI13, max. limit of the safety monitoring FC [➙ 237] (P29.13)
– LO13, min. speed of the FC safety monitoring (P29.12)
9.12 Actuating Variable Safety Functionality

If hazardous materials (combustibles) are to be conveyed, control deviation monitoring (P07.09 - P07.13)
should be activated and set with reasonable values. Weight recording at the screw discharge should also be
activated (P09.05 - P09.06). Too much material will be fed if the load measured is too low.
A safety monitoring system that monitors the ratio of actual screw speed to screw speed setpoint is availa-
ble to monitor the mechanical system and the tachometer. An event message is generated and the corres-
ponding output set if it exceeds certain set limits.
WARNING
We strongly recommend that you activate the monitoring if combus-
tibles are to be conveyed, as a failed sensor (speed sensor or weight
measurement) may lead to overfilling. Control deviation monitoring
and load measurement monitoring must also be activated.
An overdosage could lead to a fire or an explosion with severe conse-
quences for personnel and equipment.

Appendix
Fig. 21: Actuating variable safety circuit
The monitoring systems for each speed controller are independent of one another. The signal connection is
shown in the control circuit diagram [➙ 224].
Symbol Meaning
nw [%] Speed setpoint related to the nominal speed P03.02
n [%] Actual speed related to the nominal speed P03.02
n0 Nominal speed as set using parameters
Delta nw Change in the setpoint, increase in threshold values if setpoint changed
MIN range A MIN event is identified if the value lies within this range
MAX range A MAX event is identified if the value lies within this range
OK Normal range in which no event is identified
E Percentage change in the setpoint related to the nominal speed
FC dev [%] Deviation of the current value from the optimum value in % of the tolerance effective for the
current feed rate setpoint. An event will be generated if FC dev = ±100 %.

Appendix
The tolerance range is increased for changes of setpoint. The tolerance values set by parameter will be
increased by the percentage rate of the change in the moments after a setpoint change. Example: A sudden
change of setpoint of 50 % of the nominal speed increases directly after the change a tolerance set by pa-
rameter from 25 % to 75 %. If the setpoint remains the same, the increase will reduce exponentially towards
zero with a set time constant of 10 s, i.e. long after the change the tolerance will have the same effect as the
setting made by parameter.
The service value 'FC dev' shows the current deviation of the ratio between the actual value and the ideal
value as a % of the permissible tolerance n_tol. Values >100 % will trigger a max event, values < -100 %
will trigger a min event.
The value 'FC dev' is calculated from the current speed n and the speed setpoint nw based on the current
tolerance n_tol as follows:
FC dev = (n – nw) / n_tol * 100 %
n_tol is the tolerance at the operating point nw [%] set by parameter and possible increased by a component
from setpoint changes.

Appendix
9.13 Setting the Pressure Compensation

The electronic pressure compensation compensates for the force components in the hopper weight signal
caused by pressure in the hopper. The pressure forces can be great even if the pressures are low, resulting
in significant errors in weight measurement.
Fig. 22: Signal flow diagram for hopper weight measurement and pressure compensation

Appendix
The pressure in the hopper is best measured by a DMS pressure sensor for purposes of electronic compen-
sation. The input for the pressure sensor is defined in P25.02.
The parameters for the pressure sensor must be entered into P25.03 and P25.04. For atmospheric pressure
(hopper open) the measured pressure will be read as a service value and entered into P25.09.
Make a note of the weight recorded for the no-pressure state.
If possible, now apply a constant pressure to the hopper. The screw discharge must be plugged up (bulk
material or a seal) and all fill unit connections must be closed and sealed. The weight signal will increase if a
positive pressure is applied. Using P25.10 the compensation can be set so that the same weight value is
recorded under application of this pressure as previously with no pressure applied.
The function of compensation can be checked at any time with constant bin weight and variable pressure.
The weight display in the stationary state has to be independant of pressure. There might be slight fluctua-
tions in the weight displayed if there are changes to pressure.
9.14 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking'
Fig. 23: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages

Appendix
Explanations:
All signal levels can be inverted by setting the associated source parameter (also refer to Configuring the
Interfaces [➙ 57]). The factory setting is given in the diagram.
▪ LOW: closed contact in standby, i.e. power is on. The contact is open if the signal is active (functions as
opener).
▪ HIGH: open contact in standby, i.e. power is not on. The contact is closed if the signal is active (func-
tions as closer).
E: event message
DI: digital input
DO: digital output
Legend Parameter Signal Name
Alarm All event messages of event class ALARM
DI E 1 P19.06 DI: Event Electricity 1
DI EE 1 P12.02 DI: External Event 1
DI M 1 P19.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1
DO E P19.11 DO: Event Electricity
DO M P19.09 DO: Event Mechanics
DO MT 1 P19.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1
DO MT 2 P19.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2
DO R P19.16 DO: Ready
DO RS P19.18 DO: Ready for Start
IL-2 P19.10 Event: Mechanics
IL-3 P19.12 Event: Electricity
IL-4 P19.15 Event: Mechatronics
IL-5 P19.17 Event: Not Ready
IL-6 P19.19 Event: Not Ready for Start

Appendix
Legend Parameter Signal Name
Int. alarm Internal alarm resulting from event messages CA01, CA02,
WM01, WM02, WM03, WM04
NO S No service mode: no keyboard mode, no local mode,

No simulation mode
Release P04.05 Source Run Enable
SC-5 P12.01 Event: External Event 1
SC-6 P12.03 Event: External Event 2
SC-11 P12.06 DI: External Event 3
SC-12 P12.08 DI: External Event 4
NOTE: When an input source parameter accepts the value n/a, the signal is internally assumed to
be True.

Appendix
9.15 PLC Functionality (Optional)

As with a PLC, you can expand its functionality for additional simple jobs by linking signals and using func-
tion blocks. The function block links can only be configured using EasyServe. Any configuration created can
be loaded into or read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately after being
loaded.
All signals that can are available via fieldbus can be used as input signals for the function blocks. The output
signals are integrated into the standard signal processing of DISOCONT Tersus with the parameters of the
FCB analog outputs and FCB digital outputs groups.
A loaded and active link is shown on the operator panel with the information for the program by pressing the
Help button. The Empty link designates the factory default without added links.
Fig. 24: Example of a function block link
In this example, a binary input signal (for instance, an input contact of DISOCONT Tersus) is being read in
through the GP-Din 1 input block and the Delay 1 delay while an inverter is given to the And1-4 AND gate.
The other inputs are linked with the constant 1 and a Cycle 1 frequency generator. This provides the output
with a cyclical signal when the waiting period has elapsed after setting the input. The output of the AND gate
is linked to an output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The physical output requires connecting
the signal with a digital output through P32.01 FCB_DO 01.

Appendix
9.15.1 Handling the Function Blocks
Condition: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN (VPL 20430) must be installed on the
PC.
Function blocks can be edited and linked in EasyServe Expert Mode only.
For this DISOPLAN must be started with administrator rights from EasyServe as follows:
▪ Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Blocks', or
▪ Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Variants/parameters'
Supplementary documentation:
▪ BV-H2185 EasyServe operating manual
▪ BV-H2461 DISOPLAN operating manual
A detailed description of the function block editor can be found in a separate manual (BV-
H2317)
CAUTION: Creating and modifying links is reserved solely to Schenck Process person-
nel.
Configurations can be read out of and loaded into the control. They can be filed on the hard disk of PCs and
called up from there. Links have to be given a name. The 'empty link' (as a factory default) has the name
'Empty' and should not be used for other links.
WARNING
Possible loss of function when exchanging the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded, it will be necessary to store it
separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is exchanged, both the parameters
and the function block link have to be loaded separately to restore full func-
tionality. Alternatively, you can use the additionally installed tool
DISOPLAN (that contains both the parameters and the function block links)
to make a complete backup. However, this backup can then no longer be
used for setting a more recent version of the program in the scales.
It is not necessary with a system with the Empty link (refer to 'Cleaning the Screen and Information [➙ 44]')
to reload the link after exchanging the VCU since there is no expansion to the functions from the function
blocks.
Loading the function software or loading default settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have
any impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is retained. A
loaded link cannot be deleted, it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be
overwritten with a new link that has to contain at least one block.
A loaded link does not have any effect on scales operation as long as the outputs for the link are not
coupled to the scales software with the corresponding parameters P31.01 to P32.20.

Appendix
9.15.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals

The following function blocks are available.
Fig. 25: Binary function blocks
No. Type quantity Parameter Function
1 Binary input 20 Process variable as per the de- Connection of the function block logic
'GP-DIn' scription of the fieldbus interface to the function of the standard pro-
gram
2 Binary output 20 - Makes output signals available. Con-

'GP-Dout' nect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Clock generator 2 Period duration Signal generator for a periodic signal.

'Cycle'
4 'Bin. 0' 1 - Encoder for the binary constants 1 =

'Bin. 1' 1 True and 0 = False
5 Pulse generator 1 Time for the pulse The timer has three outputs that
'Timer' supply an pulse of 0.1 seconds dura-
tion at the time set.
6 AND 6 - AND link between two input signals

'And'
AND 4 - AND link between four input signals

'And 4'

Appendix
7 OR 6 - OR link between two input signals

'Or'
OR 8 - OR link between four input signals

'Or 4'
8 Negation 10 - Inverts the signal

'Not'
9 Retardation 8 Delay time in seconds Delays the input signal by the speci-
'Delay' fied time
Tab. 44 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
9.15.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals

Analog signals can be processed with the following function block.
Fig. 26: Analog function blocks

Appendix
1 Analog input 20 Process variable as per Input for a variable with a continuous value.
'GP-AIn' the description of the
fieldbus interface
2 Analog output 20 - Makes output signals available. Connecting via

'GP-Aout' parameters in the FCB analog outputs block. Only 5
FKB outputs can be configured to physical outputs.
All outputs are available as measured values in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Comparator 6 Upper and lower com- Supplies the 'True' value if the input signal lies out-
'Comparator' parative value side of the threshold values.
4 'Limit' 10 Upper and lower thre- Limits the input signal and becomes True when the
shold value limiter arises.
5 Multiplier 5 - Supplies the product of the input values at the out-

'Multiplier' put.
6 Memory 2 - The input value at MemInp is tied to Acquire with

'Memory' the increasing slope. It is available at the output. At
the same time, the Hold output indicates that a
value has been stored. The memory can be cleared
with Reset.
7 Addition 5 - Makes the sum of the input values available at the

'Add' output.
8 Subtraction 5 - Makes the difference of the input values available at

'Subtract' the output
9 Counter 6 Start value Supplies the counted input impulses at the output
'Counter'
10 Switch 1 - Switches one of the three inputs to the output

'analog switch'
11 Multiplication 20 Dividend Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor

'Factor' Divisor
12 Constant 5 The value of the con- Supplies the numerical value at the output
'Constant' stants
13 Offset 10 Dividend
'Offset' Divisor

Appendix
9.16 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters

DISOCONT Tersus has three internal totalizing integrators (=totalizing counters). The results of the counters
can be transferred to an external counter by means of one of the following ways:
▪ Via the electronic impulse output (open collector) DO8 of VCU at frequency < 10 Hz for external elec-
tronic counters. This is the most preferable method.
▪ Via a DO1 … DO7 of the VCU. The minimum impulse length is 1 s. The life cycle of the output relay is
only guaranteed for 20 million switches.
Of course, the counter readings can be read more simply via the fieldbus or in the web server.
The relevant parameters are:
P03.05 Pulse Length Total
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter
P03.09 Totalizer Increment
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter P03.05 Pulse Length Total
0 ... 9 ms 10 ms … 1 s >1 s
DO8 No pulse 10 ms … 1 s >1 s
DO1 … DO7 No pulse 1s >1 s

Tab. 45 : Long counting pulse
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Counting pulse weight determined by:
0 kg No pulse
> 0 kg P03.09 Totalizer Increment

Tab. 46 : Counting pulse weight

Appendix
9.17 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation

Most of the function errors are indicated by event messages.
A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently
wrong despite correct parameterization.
A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating vol-
tage supply to the load cells.
A test connector can narrow down any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
Fig. 27: Test Connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus instead of the load
cell cable.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electron-
ics. It must have the following value: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V ± 3 %.
Note: The raw measured data can be calculated according to the formula: raw measured data ~ 500 * R2 /
R1 [mV/V] if other resistance values should be used in the test connector
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the way the scale's rated data are set.

Index
Index
2. Password ..................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................................... 56
About This Manual ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Absolute Range.............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Accept Correction ........................................................................................................................................................... 148
Access Rights Limitation FB........................................................................................................................................... 123
Access Rights Limitation HMI........................................................................................................................................... 82
Accessing the Configuration............................................................................................................................................. 39
Acknowledging Event Messages...................................................................................................................................... 27
Active by Filling .............................................................................................................................................................. 179
active Helix ..................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Actuating Variable Safety Functionality .......................................................................................................................... 237
Address .................................................................................................................................................................. 121, 122
Adjustment Functions ....................................................................................................................................................... 45
Afterflow Measurement Time ........................................................................................................................................... 92
Agitator Control .............................................................................................................................................................. 231
Agitator Control .............................................................................................................................................................. 177
AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................................. 161
Analog Channel A10 ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
Analog Channel A11 ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
Analog Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 104
Angle Helix 1 - Helix 2 ................................................................................................................................................... 174
AO Actual Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................... 104
AO Bin Load .................................................................................................................................................................. 135
AO Check Measurement Result .................................................................................................................................... 157
AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level ............................................................................................................................... 139
AO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 107
AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................................ 163
AO Flow Rate Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 164
AO Flow Rate Range .................................................................................................................................................... 164
AO Helix Load ............................................................................................................................................................... 105
AO Helix Speed ............................................................................................................................................................. 106
AO Offset ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
AO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
AO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 126
AO Range ..................................................................................................................................................................... 135
AO Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................................ 221
Assembling the Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................ 50
Auto Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 145
Basic Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 25
Basic Tare ...................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Baud rate................................................................................................................................................................ 121, 122
Baud Rate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Behavior after Connecting the Power ............................................................................................................................... 13
Bin Adaption Factor........................................................................................................................................................ 199
Bin Controller ON ........................................................................................................................................................... 138
Bin Level analog Input Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 137
Bin Level analog Input Range ........................................................................................................................................ 138
Bin Level Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 138
Bin Level MAX................................................................................................................................................................ 134
Bin Level MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 133
Bin Load (Calibration)..................................................................................................................................................... 199
Bin Setpoint source ........................................................................................................................................................ 143
Bin Weigher.................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Bin Weigher Active ......................................................................................................................................................... 129
Bin Weigher Adaption............................................................................................................................................. 198, 199
Bin Weigher: Display and Operation ................................................................................................................................ 32
Bin Weigher: Scales and Filling Limits ........................................................................................................................... 232
Bipolar Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 131
Bypass ........................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Bypass D Portion ........................................................................................................................................................... 141
Byte Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................... 120

Index
CA01 Event Error LC Input........................................................................................................................................... 202

CA02 Event Tachometer Input ..................................................................................................................................... 202
CA03 Event Error LC Input (Bin) .................................................................................................................................. 203
CA07 Event DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................ 203
CA10 Event Error LC Input........................................................................................................................................... 203
Calculation of the Device Constants .............................................................................................................................. 228
Calibrating the Touchscreen ............................................................................................................................................ 43
Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 202
Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 102
Calibration Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 102
Calibration Weight .......................................................................................................................................................... 136
CH01 Event Minimum Check Quantity ......................................................................................................................... 203
CH02 Event Minimum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................. 204
CH03 Event Maximum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................ 204
CH04 Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 204
CH05 Event Relative Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................. 205
CH06 Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................... 205
CH07 Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 205
CH08 Event Feeder Not Stopped ................................................................................................................................. 206
CH09 Event No Check Release ................................................................................................................................... 206
CH10 Event Prepare Check Measurement .................................................................................................................. 206
CH11 Event Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................. 206
CH12 Event Check Gate Error ..................................................................................................................................... 207
CH13 Event Bin Error ................................................................................................................................................... 207
CH16 Event Limit Tare ................................................................................................................................................. 207
Check Gate Feedback.................................................................................................................................................... 157
Check Gate Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 158
Check in Keyboard Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 119
Check Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 203
Check Motor Rotations ................................................................................................................................................... 149
Check Quantity............................................................................................................................................................... 149
Check Start Span ........................................................................................................................................................... 147
Check Start Tare ............................................................................................................................................................ 147
Check System ................................................................................................................................................................ 144
Check System Influence................................................................................................................................................. 145
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation...................................................................................................... 250
Cleaning and Testing the Display..................................................................................................................................... 31
Cleaning the Screen and Information ............................................................................................................................... 44
CO04 Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 208
CO11 Event Correction MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 208
CO12 Event Limit Gain................................................................................................................................................. 208
Command and Edit Keys.................................................................................................................................................. 23
Commissioning................................................................................................................................................................. 49
Communication EasyServe ............................................................................................................................................ 117
Communication Fieldbus ................................................................................................................................................ 117
Compatibility DISOCONT Master ................................................................................................................................... 119
Compensation Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 166
Compensation analog Input Offset ................................................................................................................................. 171
Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................................ 171
Compensation Source .................................................................................................................................................... 167
Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 120
Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................................................................................. 197
Configuring Event Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 58
Configuring the Communication Path (Com) .................................................................................................................... 43
Configuring the Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 57
Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ............................................................................................................................. 39
Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ............................................................................... 14
Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 16
Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 18
Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) ................................................................................................................................ 44
Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 15, 17
Connection via Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................... 16
Connection via Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................... 15
Connection via RS232...................................................................................................................................................... 17
Connection via RS485...................................................................................................................................................... 16
Connection via WLAN ...................................................................................................................................................... 17

Index
'Continuous' Control Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 233

Continuous Hopper Fill Level Regulation ....................................................................................................................... 236
Control Level MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
Control Level MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 133
Control Measurements and Correction............................................................................................................................. 32
Control Sources ............................................................................................................................................................... 89
Controller........................................................................................................................................................................ 208
Controller in OFF-Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 136
Controller Magnitude Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 141
Controller Magnitude Volum ........................................................................................................................................... 102
Correction Evaluation ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
Correction Speed ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
Counter 1 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Counter 2 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Counter 3 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Cycle Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Cyclic Auto Start............................................................................................................................................................. 146
D Filter TD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 140
D Portion TV................................................................................................................................................................... 140
Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 195
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ..................................................................................................................... 6
Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 151
Data Format ................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Data Log ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................................................ 86
Data Log Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 195
Data Log Value 10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 197
Data Log Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Log Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Log Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Log Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Log Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Log Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Log Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Log Value 9 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196
Data Logging .................................................................................................................................................................. 195
Dead Band Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 142
Dead Band Factor .......................................................................................................................................................... 142
Dead Time TT ................................................................................................................................................................ 139
Delay reversing .............................................................................................................................................................. 179
Detail Selection ................................................................................................................................................................ 22
Details on Control Measurements and Correction 'Single' Type .................................................................................... 235
Details on Feed Rate Control ......................................................................................................................................... 221
Details on the speed controller ....................................................................................................................................... 224
Deviation abs. max........................................................................................................................................................... 97
Deviation Offset.............................................................................................................................................................. 107
Deviation Range............................................................................................................................................................. 107
DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................................ 109
DI Bin Load Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 136
DI Control MAX-Sensor ................................................................................................................................................. 137
DI Event Electricity 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 127
DI Event Mechanics 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 126
DI External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 108
DI Helix 1....................................................................................................................................................................... 173
DI Helix 2....................................................................................................................................................................... 173
DI Init. Controller ........................................................................................................................................................... 142
DI Limit Switch 1 Left..................................................................................................................................................... 177
DI Limit Switch 1 Right .................................................................................................................................................. 177

Index
DI Limit Switch 2 Left..................................................................................................................................................... 178

DI Limit Switch 2 Right .................................................................................................................................................. 178
DI Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 110
DI Overload 1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 179
DI Overload 2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 179
DI Reset Totalizer 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
DI Reset Totalizer 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
DI Speed Helix 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 91
DI Speed Helix 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 91
DI Switch On Compensation ......................................................................................................................................... 170
DI Volumetric Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 110
DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................................. 110
Dialog Behaviour .............................................................................................................................................................. 81
Digital Inputs .................................................................................................................................................................. 107
Digital Outputs................................................................................................................................................................ 113
Display and Operation Fields ........................................................................................................................................... 21
Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 132
Display Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 132
Display Load Outlet .......................................................................................................................................................... 98
Display Parameter Alterations .......................................................................................................................................... 36
Display Speed .................................................................................................................................................................. 98
Display Stored Counter Readings .................................................................................................................................... 31
Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ........................................................................................................................ 31
Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. .............................................................................................................. 31
DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 114
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 113
DO Agitator 1 Left ......................................................................................................................................................... 177
DO Agitator 1 Right ....................................................................................................................................................... 177
DO Agitator 2 Left ......................................................................................................................................................... 178
DO Agitator 2 Right ....................................................................................................................................................... 178
DO ALARM ................................................................................................................................................................... 113
DO Bin Filling ................................................................................................................................................................ 133
DO Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
DO Bin Level MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 134
DO Check Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 157
DO Check Measurement Active .................................................................................................................................... 153
DO Control Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 152
DO Correction Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 159
DO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 113
DO Event Electricity ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
DO Event Mechanics..................................................................................................................................................... 127
DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 128
DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 128
DO FC-MAX Limit ......................................................................................................................................................... 183
DO FC-MIN Limit ........................................................................................................................................................... 183
DO Feeder ON .............................................................................................................................................................. 139
DO Feeder Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 113
DO Helix 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 173
DO Helix 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 173
DO Keyboard Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 115
DO Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................................... 114
DO Load MIN ................................................................................................................................................................ 114
DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 115
DO Moisture active ........................................................................................................................................................ 162
DO Moisture MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
DO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 124
DO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 124
DO PLC 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 124
DO PLC 4 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
DO PLC 5 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
DO PLC 6 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
DO PLC 7 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
DO PLC 8 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
DO Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 170
DO Pressure-MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 169
DO Pulse Counter ........................................................................................................................................................... 88

Index
DO Ready ..................................................................................................................................................................... 128

DO Ready for Start........................................................................................................................................................ 129
DO Scale Start .............................................................................................................................................................. 113
DO Speed-MAX ............................................................................................................................................................ 115
DO Speed-MIN.............................................................................................................................................................. 114
DO Volumetric Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 115
DO WARNING .............................................................................................................................................................. 115
DO Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................................. 153
Electrical Connections ...................................................................................................................................................... 50
Electrical System............................................................................................................................................................ 208
Emergency Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................... 181
Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Evaluation Factor Gain ................................................................................................................................................... 160
Evaluation Factor Tare ................................................................................................................................................... 160
Event Absolute Span Correction Error .................................................................................................................. 155, 205
Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 154, 204
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................ 100, 212
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................... 99, 215
Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................... 119, 219
Event Agitator Overload ........................................................................................................................................ 180, 214
Event Analog Input < Offset .................................................................................................................................... 98, 210
Event Bin Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 159, 207
Event Bin Level MAX............................................................................................................................................. 134, 213
Event Bin Level MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 134, 216
Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 137, 208
Event Check Gate Error ........................................................................................................................................ 158, 207
Event Communication HMI 1................................................................................................................................... 83, 218
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ................................................................................................................ 79, 218
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ................................................................................................................ 80, 218
Event Communication VHM serial ........................................................................................................................... 84, 219
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1................................................................................................................ 80, 219
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2................................................................................................................ 81, 220
Event Correction MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 160, 208
Event Cyclic Communication................................................................................................................................. 119, 219
Event Deviation ....................................................................................................................................................... 97, 212
Event DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................... 168, 203
Event DMS-Input < MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 168, 215
Event DMS-Input > MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 168, 214
Event Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 128, 210
Event Error LC Input ............................................................................................................................... 94, 165, 202, 203
Event Error LC Input (Bin) ..................................................................................................................................... 131, 203
Event Expect Acceptance ..................................................................................................................................... 153, 206
Event External Event 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 107, 217
Event FC-MAX Limit .............................................................................................................................................. 183, 213
Event FC-MIN Limit ............................................................................................................................................... 182, 216
Event Feeder Not Stopped .................................................................................................................................... 152, 206
Event LC Input < MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 94, 214
Event LC Input > MAX............................................................................................................................. 95, 132, 211, 213
Event Limit Gain .................................................................................................................................................... 160, 208
Event Limit Tare .................................................................................................................................................... 160, 207
Event Load MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 101, 212
Event Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................... 100, 215
Event Maint. Electric.............................................................................................................................................. 116, 217
Event Maint.Feeder Run ....................................................................................................................................... 116, 217
Event Maximum Fill Weight ................................................................................................................................... 151, 204
Event Mechanics ................................................................................................................................................... 127, 210
Event Mechatronics ............................................................................................................................................... 128, 210
Event Memory ......................................................................................................................................................... 97, 218
Event Minimum Check Quantity ............................................................................................................................ 150, 203
Event Minimum Fill Weight .................................................................................................................................... 151, 204
Event Moisture MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 163, 211

Index
Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ............................................................................................................................. 110, 208

Event No Check Release ...................................................................................................................................... 147, 206
Event Not Ready ................................................................................................................................................... 129, 211
Event Not Ready for Start ..................................................................................................................................... 129, 211
Event Power Failure ................................................................................................................................................ 95, 208
Event Prepare Check Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 152, 206
Event Pressure-MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 170, 214
Event Pressure-MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 169, 216
Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 156, 205
Event Relative Tare Correction Error .................................................................................................................... 155, 205
Event Run Disabled ................................................................................................................................................ 90, 210
Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................ 95, 216
Event Speed-Max .................................................................................................................................................. 102, 213
Event Speed-Min ................................................................................................................................................... 101, 215
Event Stand-By ....................................................................................................................................................... 93, 216
Event Tachometer Input .......................................................................................................................................... 94, 202
Event Group: Calibration ................................................................................................................................................ 202
Event Group: Check Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 203
Event Group: Controller.................................................................................................................................................. 208
Event Group: Electrical System ...................................................................................................................................... 208
Event Group: Interlock.................................................................................................................................................... 210
Event Group: Material Flow ............................................................................................................................................ 211
Event Group: MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 211
Event Group: Mechanic .................................................................................................................................................. 214
Event Group: MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 214
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 216
Event Group: System Message ...................................................................................................................................... 218
Event messages ............................................................................................................................................................... 21
Event Messages ............................................................................................................................................................. 201
Events Details ................................................................................................................................................................ 202
Exit Scale ......................................................................................................................................................................... 86
Factor Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................... 96
FC Tolerance at 0% ...................................................................................................................................................... 182
FC Tolerance at 100% .................................................................................................................................................. 182
FC Tolerance at 50% .................................................................................................................................................... 182
FCB analog outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 187
FCB digital outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 191
FCB_AO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 187
FCB_AO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 188
FCB_AO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 189
FCB_AO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 190
FCB_AO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 190
FCB_DO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 191
FCB_DO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 192
FCB_DO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 192
FCB_DO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 192
FCB_DO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 192
FCB_DO 06 .................................................................................................................................................................... 192
FCB_DO 07 .................................................................................................................................................................... 192
FCB_DO 08 .................................................................................................................................................................... 193
FCB_DO 09 .................................................................................................................................................................... 193
FCB_DO 10 .................................................................................................................................................................... 193
FCB_DO 11 .................................................................................................................................................................... 193
FCB_DO 12 .................................................................................................................................................................... 193
FCB_DO 13 .................................................................................................................................................................... 193
FCB_DO 14 .................................................................................................................................................................... 194
FCB_DO 15 .................................................................................................................................................................... 194
FCB_DO 16 .................................................................................................................................................................... 194
FCB_DO 17 .................................................................................................................................................................... 194
FCB_DO 18 .................................................................................................................................................................... 194
FCB_DO 19 .................................................................................................................................................................... 194

Index
FCB_DO 20 .................................................................................................................................................................... 195

Feed Rate Measurement Adjustment............................................................................................................................... 46
Feeder Check FC ........................................................................................................................................................... 181
Feeder Constant ............................................................................................................................................................ 139
Feeder control .................................................................................................................................................................. 92
Feeder Definition .............................................................................................................................................................. 86
Feeder Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................ 93
Feeder Start ..................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................................. 152
Feedrate Setpoint............................................................................................................................................................. 89
Fig. 1: Helix weighfeeder principle of regulation (simplified)............................................................................................... 9
Fig. 10: PI controller formula .......................................................................................................................................... 225
Fig. 11: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t = 0 ...... 225
Fig. 12: Screw switchover details ................................................................................................................................... 226
Fig. 13: Helix weighfeeder device constants .................................................................................................................. 228
Fig. 14: Setpoint and switch-on sources......................................................................................................................... 229
Fig. 15: The start and stop sequence ............................................................................................................................. 230
Fig. 16: Setpoint-dependent agitator idle time ................................................................................................................ 232
Fig. 17: Control hopper scales and thresholds ............................................................................................................... 232
Fig. 18: Measuring principle 'Continuous' KME .............................................................................................................. 233
Fig. 19: Control measurements and correction process diagram ................................................................................... 235
Fig. 2: Helix weighfeeder principle of correction ............................................................................................................... 10
Fig. 20: Helix Weighfeeder hopper fill level controller .................................................................................................... 236
Fig. 21: Actuating variable safety circuit ......................................................................................................................... 238
Fig. 22: Signal flow diagram for hopper weight measurement and pressure compensation .......................................... 240
Fig. 23: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages ................................................................. 241
Fig. 24: Example of a function block link ........................................................................................................................ 244
Fig. 25: Binary function blocks ....................................................................................................................................... 246
Fig. 26: Analog function blocks ...................................................................................................................................... 247
Fig. 27: Test Connector .................................................................................................................................................. 250
Fig. 3: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display ................................................................................................. 20
Fig. 4: Trend configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 28
Fig. 5: Helix weighfeeder speed controller in volumetric operation .................................................................................. 51
Fig. 6: Parameter sets ...................................................................................................................................................... 55
Fig. 7: Feed rate calculation and control ........................................................................................................................ 221
Fig. 8: Threshold of the actuating variable monitoring .................................................................................................... 223
Fig. 9: Details on the speed controller ............................................................................................................................ 224
Filling control bin weigher ................................................................................................................................................. 86
Filling Type ..................................................................................................................................................................... 139
Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................... 98
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ........................................................................................................................................ 98
Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Filter Pressure Value DMS ............................................................................................................................................. 167
Filters ............................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Finish Check Measurement............................................................................................................................................ 148
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering........................................................................................................................ 6
Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 184
FLOAT-Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 122
Flow Rate Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 142
Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................ 105
Flow Rate Range ........................................................................................................................................................... 105
Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................................ 87
Format Data ................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ................................................................................................................................ 247
Function Blocks for Binary Signals ................................................................................................................................. 246
Further Adjustment and Maintenance .............................................................................................................................. 53
Gateway ......................................................................................................................................................................... 124
General Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Handling the Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 245
Hardware Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 78
HC1 Controller Magnitude ............................................................................................................................................. 175
HC1 I-Component TN.................................................................................................................................................... 174
HC1 Lower Limit............................................................................................................................................................ 175
HC1 Offset .................................................................................................................................................................... 175
HC1 P-Component KP .................................................................................................................................................. 174
HC1 Upper Limit............................................................................................................................................................ 175

Index
HC1 Position at STOP.................................................................................................................................................... 175

HC2 Controller Mag....................................................................................................................................................... 177
HC2 I-Component TN.................................................................................................................................................... 176
HC2 Lower Limit............................................................................................................................................................ 176
HC2 Offset .................................................................................................................................................................... 176
HC2 P-Component KP .................................................................................................................................................. 175
HC2 Upper Limit............................................................................................................................................................ 176
HC2 Position at STOP.................................................................................................................................................... 176
Helix Load (Calibration) .................................................................................................................................................. 198
Helix Load Offset............................................................................................................................................................ 105
Helix Load Range ........................................................................................................................................................... 106
Helix Speed Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Helix Speed Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 106
Helix-Controller .............................................................................................................................................................. 174
Helix-Switch ................................................................................................................................................................... 171
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 211
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................... 212
HI03 Event Load MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 212
HI05 Event Deviation.................................................................................................................................................... 212
HI07 Event Speed-Max ................................................................................................................................................ 213
HI10 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 213
HI11 Event Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 213
HI13 Event FC-MAX Limit ............................................................................................................................................ 213
HI14 Event DMS-Input > MAX...................................................................................................................................... 214
HI16 Event Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 214
HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................................. 197
HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................................. 197
HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................................. 197
HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................................. 197
HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................................. 198
HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................................. 198
HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................................. 198
HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................................. 198
HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................................. 198
HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 198
Hourly Total Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 195
I-Component TN............................................................................................................................................................. 140
ID Preset Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 184
ID Preset Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 184
ID Preset Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 184
ID Preset Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 184
ID Preset Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 184
ID Preset Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 185
ID Preset Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 185
ID Preset Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 185
ID Read Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 185
ID Read Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 186
ID Read Value 11 ........................................................................................................................................................... 186
ID Read Value 12 ........................................................................................................................................................... 186
ID Read Value 13 ........................................................................................................................................................... 187
ID Read Value 14 ........................................................................................................................................................... 187
ID Read Value 15 ........................................................................................................................................................... 187
ID Read Value 16 ........................................................................................................................................................... 187
ID Read Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 185
ID Read Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 185
ID Read Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 185
ID Read Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................. 186
ID Read Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................. 186
ID Read Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................. 186
ID Read Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................. 186
ID Read Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................................. 186
If OFF Reset Setpoint.................................................................................................................................................... 181
IL01 Event Run Disabled.............................................................................................................................................. 210
IL02 Event Mechanics .................................................................................................................................................. 210
IL03 Event Electricity .................................................................................................................................................... 210
IL04 Event Mechatronics .............................................................................................................................................. 210

Index
IL05 Event Not Ready .................................................................................................................................................. 211

IL06 Event Not Ready for Start .................................................................................................................................... 211
Interlock.......................................................................................................................................................................... 210
Interlocking ..................................................................................................................................................................... 126
IP Address...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ................................................................................................................................................. 30
Language ......................................................................................................................................................................... 81
LC Load Discharge ......................................................................................................................................................... 92
LC Load Measurement .................................................................................................................................................. 130
LC Loadcell ................................................................................................................................................................... 164
LC Characteristic Value.................................................................................................................................... 91, 130, 165
LC Filter.......................................................................................................................................................... 102, 131, 165
LC Rated Capacity ........................................................................................................................................... 91, 130, 165
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 99
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 99
Limit Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................................. 100
Limit Load MIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 100
Limit Gain ....................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Limit MAX ....................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Limit Max. Bin Error ........................................................................................................................................................ 159
Limit MIN ........................................................................................................................................................................ 199
Limit Tare ....................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Limit Values...................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ..................................................................................................................... 241
LO01 Event LC Input < MIN ......................................................................................................................................... 214
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 215
LO03 Event Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 215
LO07 Event Speed-Min ................................................................................................................................................ 215
LO10 Event DMS-Input < MIN...................................................................................................................................... 215
LO11 Event Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 216
LO13 Event FC-MIN Limit ............................................................................................................................................ 216
LO16 Event Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 216
Load Helixinlet................................................................................................................................................................ 164
Logger cycle time ........................................................................................................................................................... 195
Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) ........................................................................................................................ 44
Lower Limit ..................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Maintenance Electric ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
Maintenance Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................... 116
Maintenance interval ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
Material Flow .................................................................................................................................................................. 211
MAX ............................................................................................................................................................................... 211
Maximum Fill Weight ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
Measured Values and Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 23
Mechanic ........................................................................................................................................................................ 214
MF05 Event Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 211
MIN................................................................................................................................................................................. 214
Min. Waiting Period ........................................................................................................................................................ 178
Minimum Check Quantity ............................................................................................................................................... 150
Minimum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................................... 150
Moisture ......................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Moisture Active............................................................................................................................................................... 161
Moisture MAX................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Moisture Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 162
Moisture Range .............................................................................................................................................................. 162
Moisture Select .............................................................................................................................................................. 161
Name of the Device .......................................................................................................................................................... 21
Net Mask ........................................................................................................................................................................ 124
Nominal Bin Load ........................................................................................................................................................... 132
Nominal Flow Rate ........................................................................................................................................................... 86
Nominal Load Outlet ...................................................................................................................................................... 103
Nominal Moisture ........................................................................................................................................................... 162
Nominal Speed................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Norming.......................................................................................................................................................................... 169
Norming Factor Feedrate ............................................................................................................................................... 103
Offset FCB_AO 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 187
Offset FCB_AO 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 188

Index
Offset FCB_AO 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 189

Offset FCB_AO 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 190
Offset FCB_AO 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 191
On/Off Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Operating and Control Access ......................................................................................................................................... 14
Operating Fields and Function Calls ................................................................................................................................ 23
Operating the calibration functions ............................................................................................................................. 36, 39
Operation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .......................................................................................................................... 48
Own Address.................................................................................................................................................................. 117
P01 - Hardware Modules.................................................................................................................................................. 78
P01.01 - Analog Channel A10 .......................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.02 - Analog Channel A11 .......................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.03 - VCU20100-Unit 2............................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.04 - VCU2 Analog Channel A10 .............................................................................................................................. 78
P01.06 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 .......................................................................................................... 79
P01.07 - VCU20100-Unit 3............................................................................................................................................... 79
P01.10 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 .......................................................................................................... 80
P01.11 - VHM RS485 Address......................................................................................................................................... 80
P01.12 - VMO20100-Unit 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 80
P01.13 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ......................................................................................................... 80
P01.14 - VMO20100-Unit 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 81
P01.15 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ......................................................................................................... 81
P02 - Dialog Behaviour .................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.01 - Language ........................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.02 - Units .................................................................................................................................................................. 81
P02.03 - Scale Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.04 - Access Rights Limitation HMI ............................................................................................................................ 82
P02.05 - Remote IP Address HMI 1 ................................................................................................................................. 82
P02.06 - Event Communication HMI 1 ............................................................................................................................ 83
P02.11 - Event Communication VHM serial .................................................................................................................... 84
P02.12 - Password ........................................................................................................................................................... 84
P02.13 - 2. Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.14 - Reset Counter 1................................................................................................................................................. 85
P02.15 - Reset Counter 2................................................................................................................................................. 85
P02.16 - Switch Grav./Vol. command .............................................................................................................................. 85
P02.17 - Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ........................................................................................................................ 85
P02.18 - Filling control bin weigher .................................................................................................................................. 86
P02.19 - Data Log ON/OFF.............................................................................................................................................. 86
P02.20 - Exit Scale ........................................................................................................................................................... 86
P03 - Feeder Definition .................................................................................................................................................... 86
P03.01 - Nominal Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................................ 86
P03.02 - Nominal Speed .................................................................................................................................................. 86
P03.03 - Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................. 87
P03.04 - Counter 1 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 87
P03.05 - Pulse Length Total ............................................................................................................................................. 87
P03.06 - Counter 2 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.07 - Counter 3 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.08 - DO Pulse Counter............................................................................................................................................. 88
P03.09 - Totalizer Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 88
P04 - Control Sources ...................................................................................................................................................... 89
P04.01 - Feeder Start ....................................................................................................................................................... 89
P04.02 - Feedrate Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................. 89
P04.03 - Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................. 89
P04.04 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 89
P04.05 - Source Run Enable............................................................................................................................................ 90
P04.06 - Event Run Disabled .......................................................................................................................................... 90
P04.07 - Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................... 90
P04.08 - Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................... 90

Index
P04.09 - Relative Setpoint Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 91

P05 - Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 91
P05.01 - Pulses per Motorrevolution ................................................................................................................................ 91
P05.02 - LC Characteristic Value ..................................................................................................................................... 91
P05.03 - LC Rated Capacity............................................................................................................................................. 91
P05.04 - DI Speed Helix 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 91
P05.05 - DI Speed Helix 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 91
P05.06 - LC Load Discharge ........................................................................................................................................... 92
P06 - Feeder control ........................................................................................................................................................ 92
P06.01 - Volumetric Start-Up ........................................................................................................................................... 92
P06.02 - Afterflow Measurement Time ............................................................................................................................. 92
P06.03 - Start-Up Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 92
P06.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active ......................................................................................................................................... 93
P06.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ........................................................................................................................................... 93
P07 - Feeder Monitoring................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.01 - Event Stand-By ................................................................................................................................................. 93
P07.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ......................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.03 - Event Tachometer Input ................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.04 - Event Error LC Input ......................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.05 - Event LC Input < MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.06 - Event LC Input > MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 95
P07.07 - Event Setpoint Limited ...................................................................................................................................... 95
P07.08 - Event Power Failure ......................................................................................................................................... 95
P07.09 - Time Deviation ................................................................................................................................................... 96
P07.10 - Threshold Deviation ........................................................................................................................................... 96
P07.11 - Factor Deviation................................................................................................................................................. 96
P07.12 - Deviation abs. max. ........................................................................................................................................... 97
P07.13 - Event Deviation................................................................................................................................................. 97
P07.14 - Event Memory................................................................................................................................................... 97
P07.15 - Event Analog Input < Offset .............................................................................................................................. 98
P08 - Filters ...................................................................................................................................................................... 98
P08.01 - Filter Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................... 98
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog .......................................................................................................................... 98
P08.03 - Display Load Outlet ........................................................................................................................................... 98
P08.04 - Display Speed.................................................................................................................................................... 98
P08.05 - Filter Deviation .................................................................................................................................................. 99
P09 - Limit Values ............................................................................................................................................................ 99
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN .............................................................................................................................. 99
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................. 99
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 99
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX .......................................................................................................................... 100
P09.05 - Limit Load MIN................................................................................................................................................ 100
P09.06 - Event Load MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 100
P09.07 - Limit Load MAX .............................................................................................................................................. 100
P09.08 - Event Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 101
P09.09 - Speed-Min Value ............................................................................................................................................. 101
P09.10 - Event Speed-Min ............................................................................................................................................ 101
P09.11 - Speed-Max Value ............................................................................................................................................ 101
P09.12 - Event Speed-Max ........................................................................................................................................... 102
P10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................................................................................... 102
P10.01 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 102
P10.02 - Calibration Time............................................................................................................................................... 102
P10.03 - Controller Magnitude Volum ............................................................................................................................ 102
P10.04 - Nominal Load Outlet ........................................................................................................................................ 103
P10.05 - Norming Factor Feedrate ................................................................................................................................. 103
P10.06 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................. 103
P10.07 - Basic Tare ....................................................................................................................................................... 103
P10.08 - Tare Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 103
P11 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 104
P11.01 - AO Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................... 104
P11.02 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 104
P11.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................ 104
P11.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................... 104
P11.05 - Flow Rate Offset .............................................................................................................................................. 105
P11.06 - Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................. 105
P11.07 - AO Helix Load................................................................................................................................................. 105

Index
P11.08 - Helix Load Offset ............................................................................................................................................. 105

P11.09 - Helix Load Range ............................................................................................................................................ 106
P11.10 - AO Helix Speed .............................................................................................................................................. 106
P11.11 - Helix Speed Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 106
P11.12 - Helix Speed Range .......................................................................................................................................... 106
P11.13 - AO Deviation................................................................................................................................................... 107
P11.14 - Deviation Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 107
P11.15 - Deviation Range .............................................................................................................................................. 107
P12 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 107
P12.01 - Event External Event 1 ................................................................................................................................... 107
P12.02 - DI External Event 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 108
P12.09 - DI Acknowledge Events .................................................................................................................................. 109
P12.10 - DI Local Mode................................................................................................................................................. 110
P12.11 - DI Volumetric Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 110
P12.12 - DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................... 110
P12.13 - Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ...................................................................................................................... 110
P12.19 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 112
P12.20 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 112
P13 - Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 113
P13.01 - DO Scale Start ................................................................................................................................................ 113
P13.02 - DO Feeder Started ......................................................................................................................................... 113
P13.03 - DO ALARM ..................................................................................................................................................... 113
P13.04 - DO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................. 113
P13.05 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 113
P13.06 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 114
P13.07 - DO Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 114
P13.08 - DO Load MAX................................................................................................................................................. 114
P13.09 - DO Speed-MIN ............................................................................................................................................... 114
P13.10 - DO Speed-MAX .............................................................................................................................................. 115
P13.11 - DO Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 115
P13.12 - DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 115
P13.13 - DO WARNING ................................................................................................................................................ 115
P13.14 - DO Keyboard Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 115
P14 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................................. 116
P14.01 - Maintenance Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 116
P14.02 - Event Maint. Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 116
P14.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................ 116
P14.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................. 116
P15 - Communication EasyServe .................................................................................................................................. 117
P15.01 - Own Address ................................................................................................................................................... 117
P15.02 - Baud Rate ........................................................................................................................................................ 117
P15.03 - Format Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 117
P16 - Communication Fieldbus ...................................................................................................................................... 117
P16.01 - Protocol Type................................................................................................................................................... 118
P16.02 - Timeout Host ................................................................................................................................................... 118
P16.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .......................................................................................................................... 119
P16.04 - Event Acyclic Communication......................................................................................................................... 119
P16.05 - Check in Keyboard Mode ................................................................................................................................ 119
P16.06 - Compatibility DISOCONT Master .................................................................................................................... 119
P16.07 - Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................... 120
P16.08 - Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 120
P16.09 - Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 120
P16.10 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 121
P16.11 - Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
P16.12 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 121

Index
P16.13 - Data Format ..................................................................................................................................................... 121

P16.14 - Physics ............................................................................................................................................................ 121
P16.15 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 122
P16.16 - FLOAT-Format................................................................................................................................................. 122
P16.17 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 122
P16.18 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 122
P16.19 - Parameter ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
P16.20 - Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................... 122
P16.21 - READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................... 123
P16.22 - Access Rights Limitation FB ............................................................................................................................ 123
P16.23 - Remote IP Address FB .................................................................................................................................... 123
P17 - Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................................ 123
P17.01 - IP Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 123
P17.02 - Net Mask ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
P17.03 - Gateway .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
P18 - PLC Outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
P18.01 - DO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 124
P18.02 - DO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 124
P18.03 - DO PLC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... 124
P18.04 - DO PLC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
P18.05 - DO PLC 5 ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
P18.06 - DO PLC 6 ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
P18.07 - DO PLC 7 ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
P18.08 - DO PLC 8 ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
P18.09 - AO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
P18.10 - AO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 126
P19 - Interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
P19.01 - DI Event Mechanics 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 126
P19.06 - DI Event Electricity 1....................................................................................................................................... 127
P19.09 - DO Event Mechanics ...................................................................................................................................... 127
P19.10 - Event Mechanics ............................................................................................................................................ 127
P19.11 - DO Event Electricity ........................................................................................................................................ 128
P19.12 - Event Electricity .............................................................................................................................................. 128
P19.13 - DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................... 128
P19.14 - DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................... 128
P19.15 - Event Mechatronics ........................................................................................................................................ 128
P19.16 - DO Ready ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P19.17 - Event Not Ready............................................................................................................................................. 129
P19.18 - DO Ready for Start ......................................................................................................................................... 129
P19.19 - Event Not Ready for Start ............................................................................................................................... 129
P20 - Bin Weigher .......................................................................................................................................................... 129
P20.01 - Bin Weigher Active .......................................................................................................................................... 129
P20.02 - LC Load Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 130
P20.03 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 130
P20.04 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 130
P20.05 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
P20.06 - Bipolar Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 131
P20.07 - Event Error LC Input (Bin) .............................................................................................................................. 131
P20.08 - Event LC Input > MAX .................................................................................................................................... 132
P20.09 - Nominal Bin Load ............................................................................................................................................ 132
P20.10 - Display Format................................................................................................................................................. 132
P20.11 - Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................... 132
P20.12 - Control Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 133
P20.13 - Control Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 133
P20.14 - DO Bin Filling .................................................................................................................................................. 133
P20.15 - Bin Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 133
P20.16 - Event Bin Level MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 134
P20.17 - DO Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 134
P20.18 - Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 134
P20.19 - Event Bin Level MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 134

Index
P20.20 - DO Bin Level MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 135

P20.21 - AO Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................... 135
P20.22 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P20.23 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P20.25 - Tare (Bin)......................................................................................................................................................... 136
P20.26 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 136
P20.27 - Controller in OFF-Mode ................................................................................................................................... 136
P20.28 - DI Bin Load Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 136
P20.29 - Event Bin Load MAX Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 137
P20.30 - DI Control MAX-Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 137
P20.31 - Bin Level analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................... 137
P20.32 - Bin Level analog Input Range .......................................................................................................................... 138
P21 - Bin Level Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 138
P21.01 - Bin Controller ON............................................................................................................................................. 138
P21.02 - Filling Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 139
P21.03 - AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level................................................................................................................. 139
P21.04 - DO Feeder ON................................................................................................................................................ 139
P21.05 - Setpoint Bin Level ............................................................................................................................................ 139
P21.06 - Feeder Constant .............................................................................................................................................. 139
P21.07 - Dead Time TT .................................................................................................................................................. 139
P21.08 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 140
P21.09 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 140
P21.10 - D Portion TV .................................................................................................................................................... 140
P21.11 - D Filter TD ....................................................................................................................................................... 140
P21.12 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 141
P21.13 - Bypass D Portion ............................................................................................................................................. 141
P21.14 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 141
P21.15 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 141
P21.16 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 142
P21.17 - Dead Band Deviation ....................................................................................................................................... 142
P21.18 - Dead Band Factor............................................................................................................................................ 142
P21.19 - Setpoint Filter................................................................................................................................................... 142
P21.20 - Flow Rate Filter................................................................................................................................................ 142
P21.21 - DI Init. Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 142
P21.22 - Bin Setpoint source.......................................................................................................................................... 143
P22 - Check System ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P22.01 - Type of Check System ..................................................................................................................................... 144
P22.02 - Check System Influence .................................................................................................................................. 145
P22.03 - Auto Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 145
P22.04 - Cyclic Auto Start .............................................................................................................................................. 146
P22.05 - Cycle Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 146
P22.06 - Release Check System ................................................................................................................................... 146
P22.07 - Event No Check Release................................................................................................................................ 147
P22.08 - Check Start Span............................................................................................................................................. 147
P22.09 - Check Start Tare.............................................................................................................................................. 147
P22.10 - Accept Correction ............................................................................................................................................ 148
P22.11 - Finish Check Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 148
P22.12 - Set Quantity or Rotations ................................................................................................................................ 148
P22.13 - Check Motor Rotations .................................................................................................................................... 149
P22.14 - Check Quantity ................................................................................................................................................ 149
P22.15 - Storage Quantity .............................................................................................................................................. 149
P22.16 - Minimum Check Quantity................................................................................................................................. 150
P22.17 - Event Minimum Check Quantity...................................................................................................................... 150
P22.18 - Minimum Fill Weight ........................................................................................................................................ 150
P22.19 - Event Minimum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................. 151
P22.20 - Maximum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................... 151
P22.21 - Event Maximum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................ 151
P22.22 - Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................. 151
P22.23 - DO Control Started ......................................................................................................................................... 152
P22.24 - Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................... 152
P22.25 - Event Feeder Not Stopped ............................................................................................................................. 152
P22.26 - Event Prepare Check Measurement ............................................................................................................... 152
P22.27 - DO Check Measurement Active...................................................................................................................... 153
P22.28 - Event Expect Acceptance ............................................................................................................................... 153
P22.29 - DO Expect Acceptance.................................................................................................................................... 153

Index
P22.30 - Absolute Range ............................................................................................................................................... 153

P22.31 - Relative Range ................................................................................................................................................ 154
P22.32 - Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 154
P22.33 - Event Relative Tare Correction Error .............................................................................................................. 155
P22.34 - Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................ 155
P22.35 - Event Relative Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 156
P22.36 - Correction Evaluation ...................................................................................................................................... 156
P22.37 - Correction Speed ............................................................................................................................................. 156
P22.38 - AO Check Measurement Result ..................................................................................................................... 157
P22.39 - DO Check Gate .............................................................................................................................................. 157
P22.40 - Check Gate Feedback ..................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.41 - Check Gate Time ............................................................................................................................................. 158
P22.42 - Event Check Gate Error.................................................................................................................................. 158
P22.43 - Limit Max. Bin Error ......................................................................................................................................... 159
P22.44 - Event Bin Error ............................................................................................................................................... 159
P22.45 - DO Correction Error ........................................................................................................................................ 159
P22.46 - Event Correction MAX .................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.47 - Evaluation Factor Gain .................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.48 - Limit Gain ........................................................................................................................................................ 160
P22.49 - Event Limit Gain ............................................................................................................................................. 160
P22.50 - Evaluation Factor Tare .................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.51 - Limit Tare ......................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.52 - Event Limit Tare.............................................................................................................................................. 160
P23 - Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................ 161
P23.01 - Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................ 161
P23.02 - Moisture Select ................................................................................................................................................ 161
P23.03 - AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................... 161
P23.04 - Nominal Moisture ............................................................................................................................................. 162
P23.05 - Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 162
P23.06 - Moisture Range ............................................................................................................................................... 162
P23.07 - DO Moisture active ......................................................................................................................................... 162
P23.08 - Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 163
P23.09 - DO Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 163
P23.10 - Event Moisture MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 163
P23.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................. 163
P23.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 164
P23.13 - AO Flow Rate Range ...................................................................................................................................... 164
P23.14 - Pulse Counter corrected .................................................................................................................................. 164
P24 - Load Helixinlet ...................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.01 - LC Loadcell ..................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.02 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 165
P24.03 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 165
P24.04 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 165
P24.05 - Event Error LC Input ....................................................................................................................................... 165
P24.07 - Tare (Inlet) ....................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25 - Pressure Compensation ....................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.01 - Compensation Active ....................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.02 - Compensation Source ..................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.03 - Pressure Characteristic Value ......................................................................................................................... 167
P25.04 - Pressure Rated Cap. ....................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.05 - Filter Pressure Value DMS .............................................................................................................................. 167
P25.06 - Event DMS-Input ............................................................................................................................................ 168
P25.07 - Event DMS-Input > MAX................................................................................................................................. 168
P25.08 - Event DMS-Input < MIN .................................................................................................................................. 168
P25.09 - Zero ................................................................................................................................................................. 168
P25.10 - Norming ........................................................................................................................................................... 169
P25.11 - Pressure-MIN................................................................................................................................................... 169
P25.12 - Event Pressure-MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 169
P25.13 - DO Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 169
P25.14 - Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 170
P25.15 - Event Pressure-MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 170
P25.16 - DO Pressure-MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 170
P25.17 - DI Switch On Compensation ........................................................................................................................... 170
P25.18 - Compensation analog Input Offset .................................................................................................................. 171
P25.19 - Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................. 171

Index
P26 - Helix-Switch .......................................................................................................................................................... 171

P26.01 - active Helix ...................................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.02 - Threshold High ................................................................................................................................................ 172
P26.03 - Threshold Low ................................................................................................................................................. 172
P26.04 - Switch-Time ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.05 - DO Helix 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 173
P26.06 - DO Helix 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 173
P26.07 - DI Helix 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 173
P26.08 - DI Helix 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 173
P26.09 - Angle Helix 1 - Helix 2 .................................................................................................................................... 174
P27 - Helix-Controller ..................................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.01 - HC1 P-Component KP.................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.02 - HC1 I-Component TN ..................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.03 - HC1 Lower Limit ............................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.04 - HC1 Upper Limit ............................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.05 - HC1 Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 175
P27.06 - HC1 Position at STOP ..................................................................................................................................... 175
P27.08 - HC1 Controller Magnitude .............................................................................................................................. 175
P27.09 - HC2 P-Component KP.................................................................................................................................... 175
P27.10 - HC2 I-Component TN ..................................................................................................................................... 176
P27.11 - HC2 Lower Limit ............................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.12 - HC2 Upper Limit ............................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.13 - HC2 Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 176
P27.14 - HC2 Position at STOP ..................................................................................................................................... 176
P27.16 - HC2 Controller Mag. ....................................................................................................................................... 177
P28 - Agitator Control ..................................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.01 - DO Agitator 1 Left ........................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.02 - DO Agitator 1 Right......................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.03 - DI Limit Switch 1 Left ...................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.04 - DI Limit Switch 1 Right.................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.05 - DO Agitator 2 Left ........................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.06 - DO Agitator 2 Right......................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.07 - DI Limit Switch 2 Left ...................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.08 - DI Limit Switch 2 Right.................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.09 - Min. Waiting Period.......................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.10 - Setpoint dependent Period .............................................................................................................................. 178
P28.11 - Weight Threshold............................................................................................................................................. 179
P28.12 - Active by Filling ................................................................................................................................................ 179
P28.13 - Delay reversing ................................................................................................................................................ 179
P28.14 - DI Overload 1.................................................................................................................................................. 179
P28.15 - DI Overload 2.................................................................................................................................................. 179
P28.16 - Event Agitator Overload .................................................................................................................................. 180
P29 - Safety Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 180
P29.01 - Safety activation Option code ......................................................................................................................... 180
P29.02 - Source Emergency Setpoint ............................................................................................................................ 180
P29.03 - Emergency Setpoint ........................................................................................................................................ 181
P29.04 - Setpoint Step + ................................................................................................................................................ 181
P29.05 - Setpoint Step - ................................................................................................................................................. 181
P29.06 - Setpoint Factor ................................................................................................................................................ 181
P29.07 - If OFF Reset Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................... 181
P29.08 - Feeder Check FC ............................................................................................................................................ 181
P29.09 - FC Tolerance at 100% .................................................................................................................................... 182
P29.10 - FC Tolerance at 50% ...................................................................................................................................... 182
P29.11 - FC Tolerance at 0% ........................................................................................................................................ 182
P29.12 - Event FC-MIN Limit ........................................................................................................................................ 182
P29.13 - Event FC-MAX Limit ....................................................................................................................................... 183
P29.14 - DO FC-MAX Limit ........................................................................................................................................... 183
P29.15 - DO FC-MIN Limit ............................................................................................................................................ 183
P30 - Fixed mode configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 184
P30.01 - ID Preset Value 1............................................................................................................................................. 184
P30.02 - ID Preset Value 2............................................................................................................................................. 184
P30.03 - ID Preset Value 3............................................................................................................................................. 184
P30.04 - ID Preset Value 4............................................................................................................................................. 184
P30.05 - ID Preset Value 5............................................................................................................................................. 184
P30.06 - ID Preset Value 6............................................................................................................................................. 185
P30.07 - ID Preset Value 7............................................................................................................................................. 185

Index
P30.08 - ID Preset Value 8............................................................................................................................................. 185

P30.09 - ID Read Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 185
P30.10 - ID Read Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 185
P30.11 - ID Read Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 185
P30.12 - ID Read Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 185
P30.13 - ID Read Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 186
P30.14 - ID Read Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 186
P30.15 - ID Read Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 186
P30.16 - ID Read Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................. 186
P30.17 - ID Read Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................. 186
P30.18 - ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................ 186
P30.19 - ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................ 186
P30.20 - ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................ 186
P30.21 - ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................ 187
P30.22 - ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................ 187
P30.23 - ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................ 187
P30.24 - ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................ 187
P31 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................................................................................. 187
P31.01 - FCB_AO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 187
P31.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 187
P31.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 188
P31.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 188
P31.05 - FCB_AO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 188
P31.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 188
P31.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 188
P31.09 - FCB_AO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 189
P31.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 189
P31.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................ 189
P31.13 - FCB_AO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 190
P31.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 190
P31.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................ 190
P31.17 - FCB_AO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 190
P31.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 191
P31.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................ 191
P32 - FCB digital outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 191
P32.01 - FCB_DO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 191
P32.02 - FCB_DO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.03 - FCB_DO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.04 - FCB_DO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.05 - FCB_DO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.06 - FCB_DO 06 ..................................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.07 - FCB_DO 07 ..................................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.08 - FCB_DO 08 ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
P32.09 - FCB_DO 09 ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
P32.10 - FCB_DO 10 ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
P32.11 - FCB_DO 11 ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
P32.12 - FCB_DO 12 ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
P32.13 - FCB_DO 13 ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
P32.14 - FCB_DO 14 ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
P32.15 - FCB_DO 15 ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
P32.16 - FCB_DO 16 ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
P32.17 - FCB_DO 17 ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
P32.18 - FCB_DO 18 ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
P32.19 - FCB_DO 19 ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
P32.20 - FCB_DO 20 ..................................................................................................................................................... 195
P33 - Data Logging ........................................................................................................................................................ 195
P33.01 - Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................ 195
P33.02 - Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................... 195
P33.03 - Logger cycle time............................................................................................................................................. 195
P33.04 - Data Log Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 195
P33.05 - Data Log Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P33.06 - Data Log Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 196

Index
P33.07 - Data Log Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 196

P33.08 - Data Log Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P33.09 - Data Log Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P33.10 - Data Log Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P33.11 - Data Log Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P33.12 - Data Log Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P33.13 - Data Log Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................... 197
P34 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................................................................................... 197
P34.01 - HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................... 197
P34.02 - HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................... 197
P34.03 - HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................... 197
P34.04 - HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................... 197
P34.05 - HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................... 198
P34.06 - HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................... 198
P34.07 - HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................... 198
P34.08 - HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................... 198
P34.09 - HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................... 198
P34.10 - HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 198
P35 - Bin Weigher Adaption ................................................................................................................................... 198, 199
P35.01 - Helix Load (Calibration) ................................................................................................................................... 198
P35.02 - Bin Load (Calibration) ...................................................................................................................................... 199
P35.03 - Bin Adaption Factor ......................................................................................................................................... 199
P35.04 - Limit MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 199
P35.05 - Limit MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 199
Parameter ...................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules......................................................................................................................... 77
Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ........................................................................................................................... 81
Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ........................................................................................................................... 86
Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ............................................................................................................................. 89
Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .................................................................................................................................... 91
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ............................................................................................................................... 92
Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring.......................................................................................................................... 93
Parameter Block 08 - Filters ............................................................................................................................................. 98
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ................................................................................................................................... 99
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ........................................................................................................................... 102
Parameter Block 11 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 104
Parameter Block 12 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 107
Parameter Block 13 - Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 113
Parameter Block 14 - Maintenance interval.................................................................................................................... 116
Parameter Block 15 - Communication EasyServe ......................................................................................................... 117
Parameter Block 16 - Communication Fieldbus ............................................................................................................. 117
Parameter Block 17 - Ethernet ....................................................................................................................................... 123
Parameter Block 18 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 124
Parameter Block 19 - Interlocking .................................................................................................................................. 126
Parameter Block 20 - Bin Weigher ................................................................................................................................. 129
Parameter Block 21 - Bin Level Controller ..................................................................................................................... 138
Parameter Block 22 - Check System ............................................................................................................................. 144
Parameter Block 23 - Moisture ....................................................................................................................................... 161
Parameter Block 24 - Load Helixinlet ............................................................................................................................. 164
Parameter Block 25 - Pressure Compensation .............................................................................................................. 166
Parameter Block 26 - Helix-Switch ................................................................................................................................. 171
Parameter Block 27 - Helix-Controller ............................................................................................................................ 174
Parameter Block 28 - Agitator Control ............................................................................................................................ 177
Parameter Block 29 - Safety Functions .......................................................................................................................... 180
Parameter Block 30 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................ 184
Parameter Block 31 - FCB analog outputs ..................................................................................................................... 187
Parameter Block 32 - FCB digital outputs ...................................................................................................................... 191
Parameter Block 33 - Data Logging ............................................................................................................................... 195
Parameter Block 34 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................ 197
Parameter Block 35 - Bin Weigher Adaption .................................................................................................................. 198
Parameter Details ............................................................................................................................................................ 77
Parameter List .................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Parameter Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 59
Parameters....................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Password ......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
P-Component KP ........................................................................................................................................................... 140

Index
Physics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 121

PLC Functionality (Optional) .......................................................................................................................................... 244
PLC Outputs................................................................................................................................................................... 124
Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................................. 122
Pressure Characteristic Value ........................................................................................................................................ 167
Pressure Compensation ................................................................................................................................................. 166
Pressure Rated Cap. ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................................ 170
Pressure-MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 169
Principle of Measurement and Control ............................................................................................................................... 9
Protocol Type ................................................................................................................................................................. 118
Pulse Counter corrected................................................................................................................................................. 164
Pulse Length Total ........................................................................................................................................................... 87
Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ............................................................................................................... 249
Pulses per Motorrevolution............................................................................................................................................... 91
Range Correction ........................................................................................................................................... 103, 136, 166
Range FCB_AO 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 188
Range FCB_AO 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 188
Range FCB_AO 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 189
Range FCB_AO 4 .......................................................................................................................................................... 190
Range FCB_AO 5 .......................................................................................................................................................... 191
Rated Data ....................................................................................................................................................................... 91
READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................................. 123
Reading and Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 36
Reference FCB_AO 1..................................................................................................................................................... 188
Reference FCB_AO 2..................................................................................................................................................... 189
Reference FCB_AO 3..................................................................................................................................................... 189
Reference FCB_AO 4..................................................................................................................................................... 190
Reference FCB_AO 5..................................................................................................................................................... 191
Regulation Operation Modes............................................................................................................................................ 11
Relative Range............................................................................................................................................................... 154
Relative Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................................. 26
Relative Setpoint Offset.................................................................................................................................................... 91
Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................. 90
Release Check System .................................................................................................................................................. 146
Remote IP Address FB................................................................................................................................................... 123
Remote IP Address HMI 1................................................................................................................................................ 82
Reset Counter 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 85
Reset Counter 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 85
Reset to Factory Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 38
Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter .................................................................................................................. 26
Resolution ...................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Safety activation Option code........................................................................................................................................ 180
Safety Functionality of Hazardous Material Feeders (Combustibles) ............................................................................. 237
Safety Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 180
Safety notes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ....................................................................................................................................... 216
SC02 Event Stand-By .................................................................................................................................................. 216
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run .................................................................................................................................... 217
SC04 Event Maint. Electric........................................................................................................................................... 217
SC05 Event External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 217
Scale Name...................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Screw Switchover........................................................................................................................................................... 226
Selecting the operating range .......................................................................................................................................... 22
Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) .................................................................................................................. 41
Sequence Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................... 216
Service Functions ............................................................................................................................................................. 33
Service Values ................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Set Quantity or Rotations .............................................................................................................................................. 148
Set setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Set the Homepage (Config).............................................................................................................................................. 42

Index
Setpoint and switch-on sources ..................................................................................................................................... 229

Setpoint Bin Level .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
Setpoint dependent Period ............................................................................................................................................. 178
Setpoint Factor ............................................................................................................................................................... 181
Setpoint Filter ................................................................................................................................................................. 142
Setpoint Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 89, 104
Setpoint Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 89, 104
Setpoint Step - ............................................................................................................................................................... 181
Setpoint Step +............................................................................................................................................................... 181
Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ..................................................................................................................................... 40
Setting the Clock .............................................................................................................................................................. 37
Setting the Display ........................................................................................................................................................... 41
Setting the Pressure Compensation ............................................................................................................................... 240
Setting the Speed Controller ............................................................................................................................................ 51
Signal Words ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Signal Words for Application Notes .................................................................................................................................... 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 4
Simulation Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 38
Some Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Source Emergency Setpoint........................................................................................................................................... 180
Source Relative Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................. 90
Source Run Enable .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Special Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 28
Speed-Max Value ........................................................................................................................................................... 101
Speed-Min Value ............................................................................................................................................................ 101
Stand-By Limit Value ........................................................................................................................................................ 93
Start-Up Mode .................................................................................................................................................................. 92
Storage Quantity ............................................................................................................................................................ 149
Switch Feeding On/Off ..................................................................................................................................................... 25
Switch Grav./Vol. command ............................................................................................................................................. 85
Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 85
Switch on.......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Switching the Scales On/Off............................................................................................................................................. 25
Switch-Time ................................................................................................................................................................... 172
SY01 Event Memory .................................................................................................................................................... 218
SY02 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 218
SY03 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ........................................................................................................... 218
SY04 Event Communication HMI 1 .............................................................................................................................. 218
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial ...................................................................................................................... 219
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication .............................................................................................................................. 219
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................ 219
SY15 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ........................................................................................................... 219
SY16 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 220
Symbol for Running Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 23
System Message ............................................................................................................................................................ 218
Tab.1: Definition for formula symbols ................................................................................................................................. 8
Tab.10: Keys for the calibration programs........................................................................................................................ 36
Tab.11: Parameter sets: Usage and activation ................................................................................................................ 38
Tab.12: Keys for the calibration programs........................................................................................................................ 39
Tab.13: Keys in the VHM configuration dialog ................................................................................................................. 40
Tab.14: Fields for setting the address .............................................................................................................................. 40
Tab.15: Parameters for the display .................................................................................................................................. 41
Tab.16: Keys in the list of scales ...................................................................................................................................... 41
Tab.17: Setting startup routine ......................................................................................................................................... 42
Tab.18: Alternatives ......................................................................................................................................................... 43
Tab.19: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 45
Tab.2: Operating access .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Tab.20: Details and procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 46
Tab.23: Recommended order of steps during commissioning ......................................................................................... 50
Tab.24: Relevant speed control parameter ...................................................................................................................... 52
Tab.25: Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................................... 53
Tab.26: Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus................................................................................................. 55

Index
Tab.27: Abbreviations frequently used in parameters ...................................................................................................... 56

Tab.28: Step-by-step specification of signal links............................................................................................................. 57
Tab.29: Signal sources and their descriptions.................................................................................................................. 57
Tab.3: Function calls on the scales controller homepage................................................................................................. 19
Tab.30: Meaning of the columns ...................................................................................................................................... 58
Tab.31: The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal .......................................................... 58
Tab.32: Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel....................................................... 58
Tab.33: Event classes ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Tab.34: Event groups ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
Tab.35: Signals and function blocks ............................................................................................................................... 222
Tab.36: Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................... 224
Tab.37: Signals .............................................................................................................................................................. 225
Tab.38: Controller Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 225
Tab.39: Special cases of controller parameter setting ................................................................................................... 225
Tab.4: Work fields and functions ...................................................................................................................................... 24
Tab.40: Signals and function blocks ............................................................................................................................... 226
Tab.41: Formula symbols ............................................................................................................................................... 228
Tab.42: The states and points in time in the flow chart .................................................................................................. 231
Tab.43: Relevant parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 231
Tab.44: Blocks available for processing binary signals .................................................................................................. 247
Tab.45: Long counting pulse .......................................................................................................................................... 249
Tab.46: Counting pulse weight ....................................................................................................................................... 249
Tab.5: Control keys .......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Tab.6: Meaning of the identifier (ID) ................................................................................................................................. 29
Tab.7: Bin weigher parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 32
Tab.8: Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level ....................................................................................................... 32
Tab.9: Corrective goal of the control measurement ......................................................................................................... 33
Tare .................................................................................................................................................................................. 45
Tare (Bin) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 136
Tare (Inlet)...................................................................................................................................................................... 166
Tare Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 103
Taring the Control Hopper ................................................................................................................................................ 47
Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................................................. 50
The web server in the scales controller (VCU) ................................................................................................................. 18
Threshold Deviation ......................................................................................................................................................... 96
Threshold High ............................................................................................................................................................... 172
Threshold Low................................................................................................................................................................ 172
Time Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 96
Timeout Host .................................................................................................................................................................. 118
Totalizer Increment .......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................ 28
Type of Check System ................................................................................................................................................... 144
Units ................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Upper Limit ..................................................................................................................................................................... 142
VCU2 Analog Channel A10 ............................................................................................................................................. 78
VCU20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 78
VCU20100-Unit 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 79
VHM operating panel ....................................................................................................................................................... 20
VHM RS485 Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 80
VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 80
VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 81
Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation ...................................................... 30
Volumetric Start-Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 92
WE01 Event Power Failure .......................................................................................................................................... 208
WE02 Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ......................................................................................................................... 208
WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset............................................................................................................................... 210
Weight Threshold ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
What is the DISOCONT Tersus? ....................................................................................................................................... 7

Index
WM13 Event Agitator Overload .................................................................................................................................... 214

Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................. 120
Zero ................................................................................................................................................................................ 168
Zero Drop-Out Active ....................................................................................................................................................... 93
Zero Drop-Out Limit ......................................................................................................................................................... 93


Disocont Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder: Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Disocont Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder: Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

© by Schenck Process GmbH

All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,

Note: Translation of the original German Instruction

(origin: ST4, 36028797238332043 V5)

1 About This Manual ................................................................

3 General Diagram ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions ......................................................................................................... 25

BV-H2417GB, 1309 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

6 Further Adjustment and Maintenance ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

8 Event Messages ................................................................

BV-H2417GB, 1309 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

1 About This Manual

This manual is available in different forms:

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

Acknowledging Event Messages

Service and Maintenance

Moisture and Humidity

2.1 Signal Words

2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

BV-H2417GB, 1309 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

2.3 Damaged / Defective

BV-H2417GB, 1309 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?

DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

3.2 Some Definitions

Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Dimension Example

Z Totalized amount of Material quantity conveyed calculated Weight kg or t

F Fill weight Weight of the filled material in the feed Weight kg

Y Controller actuating Amperage mA

Xd Control deviation Difference resulting from setpoint - % %

n Speed RPM of the discharge organ motor 1/time 1/min

BV-H2417GB, 1309 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

3.3 Principle of Measurement and Control

Fig. 1: Helix weighfeeder principle of regulation (simplified)

q Actual discharge screw load PI PI controller

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

Fig. 2: Helix weighfeeder principle of correction

d / dt Difference in weight per unit of time

∆ (delta) Comparison of the measured flow rate

Cor Correction of the weight acquisition

BV-H2417GB, 1309 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

3.4 Regulation Operation Modes

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTIFLEX Helix Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2417GB, 1309

Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

VHM operating panel X X VHM touch

VHM operating panel X VHM touch

Service operating panel for the X Foil keyboard and display

Plant main computer via Fieldbus X (X) Plant main computer

Web browser via PC X VHM with PC keyboard

Service tool X EasyServe